Home

020-100367-05_LIT MAN USR Entero RPMWU-RPMSP

1. sseJppy IVIA ysnfpy aqons paT EL sonsoubeig paoueapy ZL dnjas oyny Buung ewj azaaly LL 901917 9J2QHEO OL dems 10 09 UJSYEd 1591 Keano ogey joadsy pjoysaly Jojoajeg 9497 Joy9ajeg 19497 Ndu 40 99 9q xead Ndu a qeuy 10 09 afew azaaly 19497 Aa UlSped S L uonesqeg 9 s31souberg TNA M L0ONno Oo 10 09 9 1JQUIO9D 8 404 G p 35ed 29S auweu uewoq 9 aueu JSOH G pejqeug ped sy palim OL emajen y ASE Jougns e palqeuz y U014 8 Hod dOL Z shay Jseopeoig Z SSOIPPYV dl sBumes joulsya3 9 sBunjeas youlau y Bupnoy MJOMION G Sssalppy JOJ99 014 E suondo Zzp SY Ieas A Ple SS suondo LNO ZEZ SY Bas z wees suondo NI Z Z Sy leas ZZ S8 101 U00 MO y BLAS Z paoka na 2 b Su ajey pneg n 9 suondo Zzpy Sy enas snuayy Buipeoseo el uSal9s yseids CL LNO ZEZ S 0903014 eues y ad L nue L LNO zez Sy apo leas e Aouasedsues GSO OL LNO ZEZ SH 101 U00 Mo ELIAS Z dnjas usalos yselds 6 LNO ZEZ S ajey pneg sebessay 10113 eidsig 8 suondo LNO zez su lees sexog ebesse de Aejdsiq Z sexog aBessayy Jas Aejdsig 9 NI ZEZ S8 1090 014 BBS y ees dina a 2 NI Z Z SU apoy Jenas e US EJUOZLOH E NI ZEZ S8 OUD MO y BLAS Z U
2. D 14 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference BRT BRIGHTNESS Cont d MAIN Set the brightness on the main video to the specified value in the range 1000 to 1000 PIIP Set the brightness on the PIP video to the specified value in the range of 1000 to 1000 EXAMPLES BRT 500 Set brightness to 500 on main video BRT MAIN 500 Set brightness to 500 on main video BRT PIIP 250 Set brightness to 250 on PIP video BRT IN32 100 Set brightness to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 BRT Returns the current brightness value on main video BRT PIIP Returns the current brightness value on PIP video BRT IN12 Returns the current brightness value on Slot 1 Input 2 BRU BRIGHTNESS UNIFORMITY CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enable Disable brightness uniformity and adjust brightness uniformity output SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Enable Disable Brightness Uniformity CRSA Enable Disable BRU Coarse Adjustment UITL Get Set the percent of gain at top left corner UIML Get Set the percent of gain at left side UIBL Get Set the percent of gain at bottom left corner UITR Get Set the percent of gain at top right corner UIMR Get Set the percent of gain at right side UIBR Get Set the perc
3. Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 17 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 e NO RESIZING displays the image in its native resolution which may or may not match the projector resolution For example for a source with a native resolution of 800 x 600 No Resizing in an SXGA projector will use the central 800x 600 pixels and have a black border the black border areas are unused areas see below No Resizing If 800 x 600 signal If NTSC PAL SECAM If HDTV ad T0801 variable borders No cropping of image No cropping of image e FULL SIZE uses all pixels for displaying the image regardless of source or original aspect ratio Incoming If PC or non HDTV source material having a different aspect ratio than the For all sources anamorphic signal projector will be stretched for display 1200 Image 1200 my 1920 1920 e FULL WIDTH fills the projector s display from left to right without changing the original aspect ratio of the image Depending on the source data at the top and bottom incoming anamorphic if video may be discarded cropped or the display may have black borders at the top and bottom called letterboxed 1200 NN 1200 mage 1920 1920 FULL HEIGHT fills the display from top to bottom Depending on the source this may create borders incoming anamorphic if video Cropped 1920 Cropped 1920
4. Examples Command Message from Controller Reply from Projector Turn Projector 5 on Spwr1 none What is the contrast level in Projector 30 30con CON 127 Return Contrast from Projector 30 to Controller 2 30 2con 00002 00030con 127 C 3 C 3 1 Description Of Control Types Subclasses Power Down Controls These controls are accessible when the projector is in Standby power mode i e power off as well as when powered on Power Up Controls These controls are only accessible when the system electronics are fully powered not necessarily lamp on C 3 2 Control Groups e Unsaved Controls These controls are not saved to flash The settings are not maintained between power sessions Saved Controls These controls are saved to flash The settings are persistent between power sessions Preference Controls These controls are transferable from one projector to another Example NET SUBO projector subnet e Configuration Controls These controls are projector specific settings They are non transferable between projectors Example NET ETHO projector IP address Channel Controls These settings are specific to a particular input signal Example BRT signal brightness Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual C 7 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Appendix C Serial Command Overview CH IS TIE e Option Card Controls These settings are specific to a particular option
5. CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Set the localization options such as language and display options for temperature units SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE LANG Set the system language 0 English 4 Italian 1 French 5 Chinese 2 German 6 Japanese 3 Spanish 7 Korean TEMP Set the temperature units 0 Celsius 1 Fahrenheit EXAMPLES LOC LANG 1 Set language to French LOC LANG Get language LOC TEMP 1 Set temperature to Fahrenheit LSH LOGICAL SHUTTER CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Tums OFF the LEDs in the projector to simulate a shutter operation Additionally a white shutter mode is available which allows users to correct a setting which renders the display unusable for example when no visible light is shown in IR modes SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt 0 Normal projection mode 1 Black turns OFF light 2 White correction display EXAMPLES LSH 1 Turn OFF the LEDs LSH Report current logical shutter setting D 40 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference MCS MENU CASCADING ENABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enable or disable cascading menus When disabled a single menu level wil
6. Choose Maximum from Target Color Spaceto ETT aE view the common color gamut values for the array NOTE Target Color Space set to Maximum reflects a color space larger than capable for the best array color saturation Array Capability Indicates the current projector s capability with respect to the selected color target and the target white point The information format is Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 49 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation ss CHI STE 3 50 R 999 9 G 999 9 B 999 9 W 999 9 R G B Indicates the percentage achieved of the red green and blue target gamut W Indicates the percentage achieved of the product of the RGB brightness and the target brightness Target Red x y Target Green x y Target Blue x y Displays the color values associated with the selected target color space Only values for user defined color spaces User 1 through 4 can be changed Changes to these values update the associated color space chromaticity When the Target Color Space is set to Maximum the values reflect a color space larger than capable for the best array color saturation Target White x y Displays the white x y values associated with the Select White Point option e Only values for user defined white points User White 1 through 4 can be changed e When Set White Color to Color Temperature is checked the values are calculated based on the specified White Color Temperature Cop
7. FMD 1 Enable Auto Film mode detect for Main video FRD FRAME DELAY CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Delays the output signal timing relative to the Input signal timing by a fraction of a frame and up to several frames The minimum latency can vary based on the amount of scaling applied to the image When using keystone or warping an additional latency is required depending on the amount of warp The control is only available when the Input signal is frame locked In free run mode or in cases where the signal cannot be frame locked the minimum latency defined by the scaling and keystoned warp is applied to the signal The value used is a 1 1000th of a frame For example 1000 equals 1 frame SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE STAT Retrieve the actual minimum frame delay EXAMPLES FRD 1500 Delay 1 5 frames FRD STAT Retrieve the actual minimum frame delway FRF FREE RUN FREQUENCY CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This controls sets the output video vertical frequency SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the output vertical frequency used when running in Free Run mode Refer to FLE Frame Lock Enable EXAMPLES FRF 5000 Set free run frequency to 50 Hz FRF Get free run frequency FRZ FREEZE IMAGE CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS
8. Signal 1 Dual Link DVI I bl 2 ay g Twin HDMI Input Card This card accepts 1 or 2 HDMI inputs and can route one or both inputs to the card s outputs Any input from any card can be looped out of this card The output label 1 OUT loops out the main image being displayed on the projector The output labelled 2 OUT loops out the image displayed in the picture in picture PIP Any input from any optional input card can be looped out of this card There are 5 LEDs on the module faceplate The PWR LED on the left side indicates power is applied and that the card is initialized The LEDs to the right side of the corresponding connectors indicate that a valid signal is detected In the case of the outputs the LED indicates that a signal is currently being looped out Twin HDMI Input 108 311101 01 ii S 1 IN 1 OUT 2 OUT Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 2 3 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 2 Setting Up a Source CHAISTIE Analog BNC Input Card This card accepts several types of Sync modes In 5 wire Sync mode all 5 BNC connectors are used If H C and V connectors are swapped this card will still operate normally An analog graphic source such as a VGA from a PC can be connected The card can operate in 4 wire Sync mode which accommodates 4 wire RGBC sources The composite Sync cable can be connected to either the H C BNC or the V BNC The card supports 3 wire RGB or YPBPr Sync mo
9. e ANAMORPHIC displays an anamorphic image in its native 16 9 aspect ratio The image will fill the screen from side to Anamorphic For non HDTV anamorphic only side and be centered between black bars at top and bottom Controls both the image width and height in tandem maintaining the current aspect ratio of the displayed signal data 1200 Vertical Stretch Adjusts the height of the image while keeping the width constant Use Vertical Stretch to change the aspect ratio of the display 3 18 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Pixel Track Steady flickering or several soft vertical stripes or bands across the entire image indicates poor pixel tracking Proper pixel tracking ensures that the image quality is consistent across the screen the aspect ratio is maintained and that the pixel phase can be optimized described below Tracking determines the frequency of the pixel sampling clock indicated by the number of incoming pixels per line so that all pixels generated by a particular source are sampled NOTE By default the projector samples at the correct frequency for most sources For best results use a test pattern such as a smooth grey consisting of a clear pattern of black and white pixels or a similar half on half off graphic image such as the Windows shutdown screen Adjust the slide bar until the vertical stripes broa
10. SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAIN Perform a standard Auto Setup on the main video PIIP Perform a standard Auto Setup on the picture in picture PIP video EXAMPLES ASU Perform standard Auto Setup on main video ASU MAIN Perform standard Auto Setup on main video ASU PIIP Perform standard Auto Setup on PIP BBL BOTTOM BLANKING CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the number of lines to blank turn to black at the bottom of the image This can be used to blank out any unwanted data near the bottom edge of the image A positive amount of blanking makes the image smaller A negative amount of blanking makes the image larger Negative blanking is only applicable to analog signals when the Auto Setup has not been able to set the image size correctly It is preferable not to use negative blanking but to run Auto Setup again ensuring that the content has active pixels on each edge of the image The maximum amount of bottom blanking allowed is half the image height minus 10 For negative blanking the image size can only be increased to the limit of the sync SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the bottom blanking for Slot X Input Y Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 9 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE BBL BOTTOM BLANKING Cont d MAIN Set the bottom blanking for t
11. 1 4 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHRISTIE 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 Setting Up a Source This manual assumes that the projectors have been setup and connected For detailed hardware installation and setup instructions see the Entero Installation Guide This section provides information about connecting sources and adjusting source specific image settings Illustrations are for reference only and may not depict your projector model exactly Projector Power A WARNING e Do not operate if the AC supply and cord are not within the specified voltage and power range The North American rated line cord is supplied with this projector For all other regions use only a regionally approved line cord power plug and socket e Do not use a damaged line cord We Nilo The projector is a class 2M source of visible and invisible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye hazard Turning the Projector ON 1 Flip ON the Power switch on the LM Light Module The projector takes about 2 minutes to initialize 2 When the LED display shows 2 dashes and the status light is yellow press the POWER button and then the UP arrow on the remote control 3 Press one of the Input keys on the remote to select and display the image for the source connected in 2 2
12. e e e e e e e e SXGA 1400 x 1050 resolution 0 69 1 Fixed Lens 10 bit image processing module Display of RGB NTSC PAL and SECAM video inputs and HDTV formats Picture in Picture PIP display Edge Blending ability via software for seamless displays Dual frequency IR sensor for use with standard IR remote and optional long range dual frequency remote Memory for up to 99 custom channels source setups Intuitive on screen menu system Built in GPIO port to enable active control of external devices LED display for projector status monitoring Multiple control options including RS 232 and RS 422 On board ChristieNET software Universal AC input 100 240 VAC 50 60Hz 1 4 4 How the Projector Works Sequential RGB color primaries are generated by the light module This colored light illuminates a single Digital Mirror Device DMD located in the projector head module The reflected light from the DMD chip then passes through the projection lens to the screen to display the image 1 4 5 List of Components Make sure these components were received with the projector e Projector Head Module PHM with attached Light Module LM Electronics Module EM Warranty Card Web Registration Form Line Cord rated North American NOTE Each projection system requires a User Kit P N 125 104106 xx If you did not receive a User Kit or if you want to purchase additional kits you can order them separately
13. BLB BLUE BLACK LEVEL Cont d MAIN Set the blue black level on the main video to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PIIP Set the blue black level on the PIP video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 EXAMPLES BLB 128 Set blue black level to 128 on main video BLB MAIN 128 Set blue black level to 128 on main video BLB PIIP 100 Set blue black level to 100 on PIP video BLB IN32 100 Set blue black level to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 BLB Returns the current blue black level value on main video BLB PIIP Returns the current blue black level value on PIP video BLB IN 12 Returns the current blue black level value on Slot 1 Input 2 BLD BLUE DRIVE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The blue drive level is used to compensate for different amounts of attenuation between the Red Green and Blue in the signal This is available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting achieves maximum contrast without crushing white or black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made for each source SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE
14. CHRISTIE Numerics 2D keystone adjustments 3 38 2D Keystone Cursor Offsets 3 39 A Active Input Window blanking 3 20 Adaptive Contrast 3 23 Adjust 2D Keystone 3 38 Adjust Horizontal Keystone 3 37 Adjust Vertical Keystone 3 37 adjusting contrast 3 4 adjusting images brightness See also Gamma Settings menu sharpness See Detail Settings menu auto input levels 3 24 automatic setup 3 16 color overlaps 3 23 input levels 3 24 to 3 26 overview 3 16 split screen 3 23 adjusting input levels input peak detector 3 25 advanced controls 3 30 Advanced Diagnostics 3 47 Advanced Edge Blending 3 41 3 42 Advanced Image Settings menu 3 26 All Joined network routing option 3 35 ambient light gamma correction 3 27 ambient light adjusting gamma 3 5 analog BNC input card 2 4 Array Capability 3 49 3 56 Array Color Target 3 49 array status 3 52 array status fig 3 52 ArrayLOC color management fine tune projector color 3 57 managing colors 3 55 master projector 3 56 projector color meter 3 58 ArrayLOC Configuration network 3 53 ArrayLOC menu 3 48 arrow keys remote keypad 3 7 aspect ratio Aspect Ratio Overlay 3 46 Auto Color Enable 3 50 3 51 Auto Color Enable input levels 3 25 Auto Input Level 3 24 Auto Input Searching 3 62 Auto key remote keypad 3 3 Auto Power Up 3 31 auto select channels 3 15 auto setup changes 3 3 Auto Shutdown Enable 3 31 Auto Source creating channels 3 12
15. MLK CHANNEL MEMORY LOCK CONTROL GROUP Channel SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Lock a channel from being edited SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE COxx Lock channel xx channel number from 01 to 99 MAIN Lock the channel being used by main PIIP Lock the channel being used by PIP EXAMPLES MLK get channel locked state for channel used by main MLK MAIN Get channel locked state for channel used by main MLK PIIP Get channel locked state for channel used by PIP MLK 1 Lock the channel being used by main MLK PIIP 1 Lock the channel being used by PIP MLK MAIN 0 Unlock the channel being used by main MLK C001 0 Unlock channel 1 MNR MOSQUITO NOISE REDUCTION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Mosquito Noise Reduction MNR dynamically adapts to image content effectively reducing mosquito artifacts around sharp edges in DCT based compression SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the mosquito noise reduction for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the mosquito noise reduction for main video PIIP SECD Set the mosquito noise reduction for PIP video EXAMPLE MNR 32 Set the mosquito noise reduction to mid point for main video MNU MENU SETTINGS AND CONFIGURATION CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set menu type vi
16. automatic image setup 3 16 See also adjusting images B Back Porch See clamp location Baud Rate 3 34 Black test pattern 3 41 Black Blend Enable 3 44 Black Level Blending 3 44 edge blend widths 3 44 black levels 3 22 See also input levels Blanking 3 20 Blend definition 3 41 Blend Midpoint 3 42 Blend Shape 3 42 Blend Width 3 42 3 43 3 44 Block Artifact Reduction 3 28 Bright key remote keypad 3 5 Bright ColorLOC ArrayStatus 3 52 Bright ColorLOC Configuration 3 48 Brightness 3 21 brightness See also clamp location adjusting 3 5 Brightness Uniformity adjusting 3 40 definition 3 39 prerequisites for adjustment 3 40 brightness uniformity disabling using Func key 3 6 Brightness Uniformity Enable 3 39 Brightness target adjusting 3 56 Broadcast Keys 3 36 broadcasting See Proj key buttons See remote keypad Bx projector blue CIE 1931 x capability 3 53 BY projector blue CIE 1931 Y capability 3 53 By projector blue CIE 1931 y capability 3 53 C Cards settings 3 47 Cascading Menus 3 33 CAUTIONS before servicing 5 1 LED radiation 5 3 light module 5 4 stay out zone 5 1 Center Brightness 3 44 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Index changing case editing text 3 9 Channel Edit menu 3 15 Channel key remote keypad 3 4 Channel Setup menu channels Channel Setup menu 3 12 channels 3 11 Auto Select 3 15 Channel Edit menu 3
17. you can still hide error messages and slidebars by disabling these options in the Menu Preferences menu Main Menu gt Configuration Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 5 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 3 6 Shutter The shutter is open upon power up Press and hold SHUTTER to move between simulated shutter states in the order OPEN CLOSED WHITE OPEN Or press and release SHUTTER followed immediately by UP arrow key Closed or DOWN arrow key Open to guarantee the correct state Close the shutter to block the displayed image while maintaining access to projector functions The white shutter state allows you to view menus and images if RGB brightness is set to 0 The LED status display shows SH when the shutter is in either black or white modes Function Key In a Numeric Field in a Menu Use FUNC to enter a negative number In a Text Field Press FUNC followed by e the UP arrow key or DOWN arrow key to convert between capital and lowercase letters e the LEFT arrow key or RIGHT arrow key to insert or delete a character e the ENTER to delete all characters Within a Presentation Press FUNC followed by 2 numeric numbers to enable a specific color or colors in the display see right For example A pa X 6 1 will display only red and 62 will display green data CCOO Bue Eliminating one or more colors can help with certain diagnostics and setups CA Yellow such as when accurately overlaying one image on top
18. 0 100 percent WGTH FUTURE USE Sets the gamut threshold at which a warning is issued when warnings are enabled 0 100 percent IRTG FUTURE USE IR Brightness Target Sets the target brightness that the projectors in the array brightness group should meet 0 1000 DSEL Allows selection of the duty cycle mode of operation 0 Automatic 1 Preset SKEY Synchronize remote control keystrokes test pattern and color enable amongst array projectors 0 Independent 1 Synchronized SFRD Synchronize frame delay amongst array projectors 0 Independent 1 Synchronized AFRD Sets the array frame delay parameter Applies to all projectors in array if SFRD is set to Synchronized AFRS Read only control reports smallest frame delay value in array that will not generate tearing artifacts Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference ABL ARRAY BRIGHT COLOR LOC Cont d SRGB Synchronize RGB Brightness setting amongst array projectors 0 Independent 1 Synchronized SACF Synchronize AccuFrame setting amongst array projectors 0 Independent 1 Synchronized EXAMPLES ABL EABL 1 Turn ON Array Bright ColorLOC and run in Fixed mode ABL BRGP 2 Set the brightness group to 2 ABL BRTG 400 Set the brightness target to 400 Lumens ABL ADIN Return current value of adjustment interval in seconds ACE AUTO COLOR EN
19. Fade Time Control the amount of time in seconds it takes to fade between images on a source switch It also fades in the PIP and OSD if possible Frame Locking Enable or disable Frame Lock When set to Frame Lock output image frames are locked to the input if possible When Locked the output is always locked to the primary input never the PIP image Free Run sets the output to close to 60Hz for all sources Entero R PMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 61 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 3 62 Section 3 Operation i C S S SCC STE Auto Input Searching When enabled the system will continually search for the next valid signal when no signal is present or when loss of sync occurs on the current user selected input In the case of multiple signals to choose from the order is based on slot followed by inputs on that slot HDMI Output Loop Source This control is used to configure the HDMI output options Selecting Direct Loop will directly pass through the HDMI Input signals on the same Twin HDMI Input Card the Inputl signal is looped to Output and the Input2 signal is looped to Output2 Selecting Main Secondary Loop will loop the Main amp PIP video to the outputs regardless from which card these signals originate The Main video signal is looped to Outputl and the PIP video signal is looped to Output2 Selecting Disable will shut OFF the HDMI outputs completely Standby Active Loop Through Selec
20. INxy Set the blue drive on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 MAIN Set the blue drive on the main video to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PIIP Set the blue drive on the PIP video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 EXAMPLES BLD 128 Set blue drive to 128 on main video BLD MAIN 128 Set blue drive to 128 on main video BLD PHP 100 Set blue drive to 100 on PIP video BLD IN32 100 Set blue drive to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 BLD Returns the current blue drive value on main video BLD PIIP Returns the current blue drive value on PIP video BLD IN12 Returns the current blue drive value on Slot 1 Input 2 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 13 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHKXISTIE BOG BLUE ODD PIXEL GAIN CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This adds an offset to Input blue gain settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLx0 Set a blue gain offset for the second A to D EXAMPLES BOG SL10 10 Set a blue gain offset to 10 on Slot 1 BOO BLUE ODD PIXEL OFFSET
21. i Cs s s SCSC WASTE e Red green blue part of blue changes the system color to blue All other menu options change the system color to white The color resets automatically when you exit the menu Test Pattern Enable Check this option to enable the automatic display of a flat white test pattern when you select the Array Color Target menu The test pattern is turned off automatically when you exit the menu Copy Adjustments From Copies the adjustment values from the selected color space to the current color space White Brightness Adjustment Use this option to adjust the RGB brightness for the projector ArrayLOC Status Use this option to review the capabilities of the specified group of projectors see ArrayLOC Status Filter on page 3 53 Total number of projectors in same Bright ColorLOC Primary coordinates from White coordinates from Array Array Color Target menu Color Target menu rgb 600 300 210 650 0 Common Gamut 600 300 210 600 Flags ProjlD Group WBA Rx Ry W 1 211 100 wW 0 213 100 701 296 362 9 210 747 679 1 Figure 3 15 ArrayLOC Status 145 023 57 5 313 3 The ArrayLOC status window Figure 3 15 includes the following information The target gamut and calculated common gamut are shown in the same format as the projector data below For the common gamut if it is smaller than the target gamut this is indicated in the
22. 07 Menu Preferences Adjust the appearance content and or location of on screen menus and messages Menu Preferences 4 Large Menu Font 7 Large Menu Font Menu Location Custom 7 Horizontal Shift O 120 Enter a checkmark to enlarge menus and their text Adjust PREPARA 60 Menu Location to accommodate the increased menu area EA i Men iLocation Display User Message Boxes vy Use the drop down list to choose a pre defined default or i Display Error Messages Serial ports y customized location for the display of on screen menus Splash Screen Setup Startup amp No Signal To create a custom menu location OSD Transparency O Menu Type Advanced Menu y 1 Choose a preset that is closest to the desired location PR Splash Screen Default Splash Screen 2 Adjust Horizontal Shift and Vertical Shift slide bars PRESETS O to move the menu to the desired location NOTE 4void locations too close to a corner or edge to prevent cropping of larger menus Horizontal Shift and Vertical Shift Shift your menus as desired creating a customized menu location Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHK IS TIE Section 3 Operation Display Automatic Message Boxes Check to enable message boxes that are not directly triggered by user actions for example signal information message boxes Display User Message B
23. Active Input Window 1920x1200 Active Input Window eT lt lt Figure B 3 Main window l CHRISTIE DHS Gmn 2r Pain E Pan 3 Click the Login button The Main window see Figure B 3 appears F Projector Information On Lamp On Open On 2010 04 15 Time 13 00 30 192 168 230 164 00 1A D7 00 32 6E IP Address MAC Address CHAISTIE The following table describes each area found in the Main window See Figure B 3 Secondary Tabs specific to a primary tab located along the bottom of the Main window PIP Active Input Window and Main Active Input Window sections are read only These sections provide drop down list selections refer to Section 3 Operation for more details Primary Tabs located along the top of the Main window Current Status Bar provides information messages according to the current status of the projector Projector Information section is read only Status Indicator displays the overall status of the projector based on the 12 categories of information available NOTE Click the Status Indicator LED to display the Status window and obtain more information about any current errors and warnings See Section B 3 2 Main Tab Status Logout button located at the top right corner of the web browser is used to logout you off of the web user interface and the pr
24. Blinders are recommended for fixed installations ee 3 Do not use black level blending if TWIST was used for j ba a the geometry Black Level Blending Procedure NOTES 1 Adjust edge blending before adjusting black levels 2 The zones in Black Level Blending BLB menu correspond to the Edge Blend zones If a given Edge Blend zone width is set to 0 i e no blend on that side then the corresponding BLB zone is disabled It only becomes accessible when that Edge Blend zone is active 16 Reset Black Level Blending Settings 1 Start with 2 projectors Select the black test pattern for both projectors from the Geometry and Color submenu 2 Inthe Black Level Blending submenu enable black blending 3 Set the blend width 4 Working with one projector at a time use the center brightness slidebar to adjust the center brightness brightness of the non blended region so that the center intensity matches that of the brightest blended region the center of all images when blending a 2 x 2 display is the target area 5 You can choose which of the next four options Top Bottom Left Right to use depending on which edge of the projector you are working with has been edge blended The blend width can be adjusted to line up properly but by default it corresponds to the edge blending setting determined for that edge 6 The brightness and black hues of the blended region can be adjusted in more detail in case fine tuning is needed
25. CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This adds an offset to Input blue black level settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLx0 Set a blue black level offset for the second A to D EXAMPLES BOO SL10 10 Set a blue black level offset to 10 on Slot 1 BRT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The Brightness control adjusts the offset applied to the Input signal It has exactly the same effect as adjusting the Input levels except that it operates an all 3 colors and can be used to make quick adjustments For precise control the Input level adjustments should be used If the setting is too high black portions of the image are displayed as dark grey making the image appear washed out If the setting is too low dark greys are displayed as deep black and detail is lost in the darkest parts of the image This condition is known as crushing When adjusting start from a lower setting and adjust upwards until just above the point where black is crushed SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the brightness on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 1000 to 1000
26. IMPORTANT Double check that all WHITES and LIGHT OUTPUT are well matched Enable the Brightness Uniformity check box This will enable access to the uniformity controls and will apply the settings to your image Select the 13 Point test pattern for Full White for display The 13 Point test pattern provides nine screen zones with 13 targets see Figure 3 12 Determine by eye or meter which areas need to be adjusted FOR BEST RESULTS Rather than examining the CENTER of each zone when assessing Brightness Uniformity adjustments focus on extreme EDGES as indicated in the illustration at right Enable Coarse Adjustment to quickly apply display changes without redrawing the whole image Use sliders to achieve relative uniformity in the necessary zone Disable Coarse Adjustment to accurately display changes as you make them Use sliders for fine adjustment as necessary in the required zones A Figure 3 12 13 Point Test Pattern Adjust Overall Gain to ensure that overall light output remains well matched from one screen center to the next For a description of the Eye Motion Filter control refer to Noise Reduction Settings on page 3 28 Cancelling Brightness Uniformity If you do not want to use or apply Brightness Uniformity settings delete the checkmark from the Brightness Uniformity Enable check box at the top of the Brightness Uniformity menu 3 40 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 0
27. In Menu channels 3 15 including channels in menus 3 15 input card See DVI input card Input Drive See Input Levels Input key remote keypad 3 4 Input Level Detector 3 46 input levels adjusting 3 24 to 3 26 adjusting with input peak detector 3 25 Input Levels menu 3 24 Input Peak Detector 3 25 3 46 Input Video Black 3 22 inputs and channels See also channels See also switching inputs overview 3 10 installation and setup connecting sources 2 2 intensity See chrome luma delay Interconnections A 3 IP Address setting 3 35 IR remote keypad layout fig 3 2 wired 3 3 IRE values See Input Video 3 22 K Keep Aspect On Auto Setup 3 61 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE Keep Aspect On Auto Setup aspect auto set up 3 19 keys See remote keypad Keystone 2D adjustments 3 38 definition 3 36 horizontal and vertical adjustment 3 37 resetting settings 3 39 keystone disabling using Func key 3 6 L Labels projector 5 1 labels projector 1 1 warning symbols 1 1 Language 3 30 Large Menu Font Menu Preferences 3 32 Laser key remote keypad 3 7 laser pointer specifications 3 7 laser pointer remote keypad 3 1 LED status 6 2 LED radiation CAUTION 5 3 LED Strobe Adjust 3 47 LED status error conditions 6 3 Lens cleaning 5 3 installation 5 5 removal 5 4 specifications 7 4 Level Detector Threshold 3 46 3 47 Light Engine Test Pat
28. NOTE The contents of the Serial Representation box Figure B 14 are read only Click the Help button for a description of special RTE commands available for adding loops and delays to the command sequence Click the Test button to test the entered command string NOTE Jf the test passed or failed a green or red icon appears to the right side of the Test button as shown in Figure B 16 CE Figure B 16 Test Buttons Click Finish to create the added event NOTES 1 The added event appears in the RTE Listing window See Figure B 17 2 To activate or deactivate one or more RTEs listed in the RTE Listing window select or clear each check box in the Active column accordingly Active Description Trigger Status D RTE 1 Daily Scheduled Event 2009 09 04 01 01 01 Idle D RTE 2 Weekly Scheduled Event 2009 09 04 02 02 02 Idle O RTE 3 Monthly Scheduled Event 2009 09 04 04 04 04 Idle i RTE 4No Signal System Event No Signal a Ide O RTE 5 LXLHLXL GPIO Event LXLHLXL Idle Figure B 17 RTE Listing Window Example Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual B 11 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Appendix B Web UI B 12 To Add a System Event 1 Click Add to open the RTE Wizard 2 Select the System Event tab CHAISTIE Figure B 18 Select a type of event from the System Event drop down list See Figure B 19 RTE Wizard Scheduled Event System Event G
29. No Configuration Password protected menu rw w 211 A14 A13 Are the missing projector s c5 Yes E n e hers Yes set to the correct Ae Bright ColorLOC Group Ez Entero R PMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 6 9 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting Tree 6 6 7 ArrayLOC Troubleshooting Tree Continued Array Brightness Setup Troubleshooting ArrayLOC START HERE C7 Menu Reference Go to the Main gt Configuration 4 gt ArrayLOC 13 gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration 3 menu Select the Array Status menu item to display the Bright ColorLOC Array Status Do the colors and brightness of the array projectors match Are the array colors red green blue white the expected colors Bright ColorLOC Array Status Target Gamut 800 330 lt Target Common Gamut _ 687 306 07 c9 160 800 193 738 Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Projector Color Adjustment Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt ArrayLOC Configuration Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration 125 000 150 34 Flags ProjlD Group Int Age Rx Ry 211 211 211 211 i 3 i i RY Gx Gy GY Bx By CHRISTIE Menu gt Status Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Color Saturation Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Advanced Color Adjustment Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Ar
30. R is the Repeat Every interval i e repeat on the same date every R months NOTE If there are not 31 days in the next run cycle month the event will not run in that month Function Key Events RTE F K description command where K the specific function key 1 5 7 9 Key 6 is reserved and cannot be used DMX Events RTE M C description command where C channel 54 63 System Events RTE S E T description command where E is the event to respond to D 58 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference RTE REAL TIME EVENTS Cont d 0 Boot Up 2 Any System Error 1 Power ON OFF 3 Good Signal T 0 Either a Power ON or OFF event 4 No Signal T 1 Power ON only 5 Input Change T 2 Power OFF only 6 Channel Change T channel where channel is 1 99 GPIO Events RTE G AAAAAAA description command where A is GPIO Input for each pin X don t care H when pin is high See GIO General Purpose Input Output on page D 31 L when pin is low See GIO General Purpose Input Output on page D 31 Delete All Events RTE X Delete a single event RTE X A where A is the event to be deleted 0 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE Single Occurrence Events RTE T 2008 12 25 11 48 00 S description LSH 1 close the shutter at 11 48 00 on
31. Reset the projector by powering it off and on again cooling when necessary System Errors Shows that a serious malfunction exists and must be reported to the manufacturer as soon as possible The projector will no longer operate Reset the projector by powering it off and on again cooling when necessary 6 2 1 LED Status Display on the Projector Projector status is indicated by a single three color LED adjacent to a 2 digit status display Refer to Table 6 1 for a description of LED variations that indicate operation status A solid red LED indicates a system error and the corresponding error code indicates what the error is Refer to Table 6 2 for a list of error codes Press to acknowledge and clear the error code Table 6 1 LED Operational Status Codes LED Status 2 Character Display Description Rotating Warming up e PR Programming TI Solid yellow p S Failsafe mode EM in fail safe mode refer to the Visual Environments Projector Software Upgrade instruction sheet 020 100443 xx static STANDBY mode moving up and down Brief cool down period BO Booting when power first applied When powering ON booting the projector e B1 Boot phase 1 starting main script the LED will go through phases Solid green B2 Boot phase 2 starting projector code Powered ON e B3 Boot phase 3 about to initialize connections Normal operations EMON SH Shutter Mode activ
32. This will only return a on success or a on failure NAK FULL ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Insert a character just after the start code This will return the message sent as a reply This is a quick way to confirm success with set messages and is particularly useful with long distance communication links or where the projectors and or images are not visible from the controller Acknowledgements can also be a type of flow control e CHECKSUMS For maximum message integrity add a checksum character amp just after the start code You must then also include the correct checksum total 0 255 just before the end code Make sure to add a space before the calculated checksum to separate it from the last data parameter The checksum is the low byte of the sum of the ASCII values of all characters between the and the beginning of the checksum but not including either It does include the space in front of the checksum Calculate the checksum for the above set contrast to 64 command as follows CHECKSUM EXAMPLE amp c o0 n 6 4 space 26h 63h 6Fh 6E h 36h 34h 20h 01F0h FOh when only the low byte is used 240 The projector collects all of the message bytes as defined in the first byte of the message then creates its own checksum value for comparison with the checksum included in the controller s message If the values match the message is considered to have been correctly
33. message format C 1 Serial Flow Control 3 34 Serial Mode 3 34 Serial Protocol 3 34 Service CAUTION 5 1 DANGER 5 2 menu 3 47 requirements 5 2 Index 4 servicing See also safety Set Frame Delay 3 30 Set White to Color Temperature 3 50 Show Blending Overlap 3 41 3 42 shutdown automatic 3 31 Shutter key remote keypad 3 6 signal type channels 3 13 Size and Position menu 3 17 slide bars menus 3 8 Slot key input remote keypad 3 4 slots See also inputs and channels sources connecting 2 2 2 5 sources See inputs and channels specification laser pointer 3 7 Specifications 7 1 display 7 3 electromagnetic compatibility 7 2 emissions 7 2 environmental 7 2 immunity 7 2 inputs 7 8 lenses 7 3 light module 7 4 mounting 7 5 physical 7 5 power requirements 7 3 safety 7 1 standard components 7 7 Splash Screen 3 33 Splash Screen Setup Menu Preferences 3 33 Split Screen 3 23 Standard components 7 7 Standby Active Loop Through 3 62 Standby mode auto shutdown 3 31 Status 3 58 display 6 2 LED 6 2 Stay out zone CAUTION 5 1 Subnet Mask 3 35 Swap key remote keypad 3 4 Swap Main amp Secondary inputs 3 60 switching inputs 3 10 secondary input PIP 3 11 Sync Tip See clamp location synchronize master projector 3 56 Synchronize to This Projector 3 48 3 56 System errors 6 1 system parameter 3 30 System warnings 6 1 T Target Color Space 3 49 3
34. ves array resolve the problem OR Call Tech Support Does cycling AC power to the problem projector resolve the problem Proceed to Fine Tuning of Projected Colors Managing Colors with ArrayLOC in Section 3 Is the Adjustment Interval set to an appropriate value Menu Do the mismatched projectors gt Configuration change color when another projector gt ArrayLOC takes control of the array and gt Array Color changes the Array Color Target Target wy wY Section 6 Troubleshooting Tree 6 11 CHRISTIE 7 Specifications RPMSP LEDO1 RPMWU LEDO1 RPMHD LEDO1 Imaging imaging 1 chip DLP 1 chip DLP 1 chip DLP technologies A Y native resolution SXGA 1400 x 1050 WUXGA 1920 x 1200 HD compatible HD 1920 x 1080 illumination Standard cube options Inputs standard scan rates Light Emitting Diodes red green blue Light Emitting Diodes red green blue Light Emitting Diodes red green blue 50 24 depth 72 33 depth 70 35 depth gt 67 31 depth e Other sizes available built to order e Other sizes available built to e Other sizes available built to order order Digital DVI I with analog VGA Horizontal 15 120Hz e Vertical 23 97 150Hz e Pixel clock 165 MHz expansion 3 input module slots available optional modules VGA Digital DVI An
35. 1 Operation MTN AN ite Refer to Safety Warnings and Guidelines in 5 Maintenance This section describes the controls and switches used for basic projector operation once it is properly installed aligned and configured by a Christie accredited service technician You can access projector controls and settings with the standard IR remote or with laptop using the web interface This chapter focuses on the use of the remote and the projector menus For information about access the same functionality through the web interface refer to Appendix B Web User Interface Using the IR Remote WIN ye Laser radiation is emitted from the laser diode in the remote Do not look directly into the laser beam The standard IR remote can be used as a wired or wireless control Under optimal conditions the wireless keypad can communicate with a projector over a 100 foot distance In wireless mode the standard IR remote communicates with the projector with a battery powered infrared IR transmitter Use the standard IR remote the same way you would use a remote control supplied with a TV or DVD player When pressing a function key direct the standard IR remote toward the projector s front IR sensor The IR sensor on the projector will detect the signal and relay the commands for internal processing A laser pointer is built into the standard IR remote Refer to 3 1 1 IR Remote on page 3 2 Keep these guidelines in mind e Press keys one at a time th
36. 2 4 Optimizing the Projectors for the Source 2 6 1 9 Select Image Orientation in the Configuration gt Output Settings menu and change the orientation of the displayed image to suit the installation For example for Christie cube installations select Rear Projection Inverted Assign a unique projector ID number for each projector If the projectors are connected serially enable Broadcast Key in the Communications menu This allows you to switch between communicating with one or all projectors Display the source to optimize Select Auto Setup to give the projector a chance to setup the best possible settings for the chosen incoming signal Make sure that the Processing Mode Image Settings menu is correct for the selected source Change Resize Presets if you want the image displayed at a resolution other than native For analog sources adjust Pixel Phase and Pixel Tracking from the Size and Position menu to eliminate noise from the displayed image ArrayLOC automatically adjusts projector colors and brightness Ensure that ArrayLOC is enabled 10 If required adjust image Blacklevels and Input Levels 11 Ifrequired optimize Projector Color and Brightness see Managing Colors with ArrayLOC on page 3 55 12 If required adjust brightness uniformity see Adjust Brightness Uniformity on page 3 40 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation 3 3
37. 2 Labels 100 Markings A Ai 5 1 5 23 MES ECC TIONS O No II II EEEE ONTEER EE aSa 5 2 5 2 4 Projector Loi ias 5 2 a R aaoi 5 2 5 2 6 Preventative Maintenance Aa 5 3 A N E NEER EEE 5 4 54 Lens Rep A A ER E E 5 4 SAL Remove LenS id eed 5 4 Pa A EATS A A E o E E E EE 5 5 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 Tro bl shooting Guide lihe dia 6 1 6 2 System Warnings EITO S isis 6 1 Syst m Warnings ls 6 2 SS a 6 2 6 2 1 LED Status Display on the Projector is 6 2 0 2 2 EEO CodeS AAA 6 3 DI E E A E A E 6 5 6 3 1 Projector Doce Not Power N sil it 6 5 6 4 Licht Module sesser EREE EEE EE EE EEE EERE ue ene 6 5 6 4 1 Light Module Suddenly Goes DR ass 6 5 69 DISplayS etere a E e EEEE ates eos OEE EEE E AO EEE EE eerie 6 5 6 5 1 The Projector Is ON but There Is No Display oooonoccnnncnnocococcconcnononononoconocnn cono noconocnnnconnnos 6 5 6 5 2 Th Display Is Jittety or Usable ai A ioiii iosia 6 5 6 3 3 The Display Is F lten rnise an R A EEEE RE E E AE 6 5 6 5 4 The Upper Portion of the Display Is Waving Tearing or JitteriM8 ooooonicnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnncnnos 6 6 6 5 5 Portions of the Display Are Cut OFF or Warped to the Opposite Edge ooooocconccccoccconcconos 6 6 6 5 6 Display Appears Compressed Vertically Stretched ooooonnccninccinncinococonnconcnonnnconnccnnccnnoos 6 6 6 37 D ta is Cropped Tronas 6 6 6 5 8 Display Quality Appears to Drift from Good to Bad Bad to Good c cococonncccnocccoccconncconocanoss 6 6 6 5 9 Display H s S
38. 2012 Section 3 Operation O CHKISTIE Video Options This submenu is used with video sources only Enable Decoder AGC Automatic Gain Control AGC affects decoded video images only Enter a checkmark default in most instances Activate the decoder s AGC circuit to ensure properly bright images Delete the checkmark if a decoded video image exhibits strange color artifacts such as stripes in highly saturated colors indicating an incompatibility between this source and the AGC Video Standard For most video standards available in the world the 10 Adaptive Contrast projector automatically detects the incoming horizontal and vertical frequencies and sets the projector s processing of this signal to the corresponding standard The current video standard name appears in the Video Options submenu and includes an A if it is auto detected Press ENTER to view or select a different video standard from those available to the projector any that are disabled have frequency characteristics that differ from those of the incoming signal Selecting a specific standard forces the projector to process the signal according to this standard 11 Split Screen NOTE Best results are obtained with defined channels Otherwise switching from one video source to another can sometimes cause slight disturbances in the display indicating that the Auto function is struggling Recover by briefly selecting a different video standard then g
39. 3 41 Advanced Edge Blending Controls aminas 3 42 Diagnostics CAMION sissisrasusinrare E E EE 3 45 A e a AT A ee eee 3 47 Option Card Settings a 3 47 Array LOC MENU AAA UA ER E RO A 3 48 Managing Colors with ArrayLOC in ide 3 55 A A 3 58 3 4 6 Secondary Input amp Switching sscsiccissanss ecsnneceaievestecvnnaasecascnssaceascessacenenssoeancesbacenunsesctseaseaere 3 59 M in Inp t ic 3 59 Secondary MPUt seseriai O A o CE E ere en eee ree 3 59 Swap Main amp Secondary INPUTS a eiae EE EE EE Ei iei 3 60 PIP Enable ina 3 60 PIP Window OPtIOnS scsi EEE A EEEE EE 3 60 Secondary Size amp POSITION ei 3 61 Secondary Image Settings lideran 3 61 Fade ios 3 61 Frame Locking A A A AS 3 61 AUTO Input Searching ada 3 62 HDMI OQ tp t Loop SUE rie 3 62 Standby Active Loop Through cssasvecexteuseaceseaconacanasenssaeucausueeantneeesgaveacsrearonncenancearsunrexoinsandiness 3 62 4 Menu Tree 4 1 Men Traci aisaen Enit haa TERE AEEA EK ANEEL aN E EAE SEASTAR EESE RE TERESE EE EER 4 3 4 1 1 Menu Tree Continued Configuration aaa oa 4 4 4 1 2 Menu Tree Continued Geometry and Color oooooconcccincccococoncnononcnnncnnnconn conocio cono cnncrnncconncns 4 5 4 1 3 Menu Tree Continued Array LOC iria 4 6 5 Maintenance Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual iii 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Table of Contents ss CHIISTIE 5 1 Maintaining Proper Cooling at 5 1 5 2 Maintenance and lO ios 5 1 5 2 1 Warnings and Safety Cuide ls ie 5 1 5 2
40. 34919 uo p y ojun ajajeg euueyy 34213A jauueyg dog jeuueyd PS uoljesadQ puueyy 7213S sBues 10 09 y sBunes uogonp y SSION E sBumes 1 eJ9Q Z suyas euueo sBunjes abeu paoueapy Joyo9 aq yeeq indu OL aiqeuz 10109 LL uojeso7 dweep 6 a1qeuy JojoD ony g aAuq yndu lt qd gt enI g Z 9A9P198 8 lt q d gt anIg 9 amsadw JOJOD Z 3AuG indu lt A gt U9AID G Jjueusn py 10109 9313S 9A9p98 g lt A gt UBAID y sBunyjos 10109 AA SAG Indu lt Id gt P9Y E 9A9P198 8 lt Id gt P9Y Z Joy eG eee a E 18n97 ynduy oy i i s a 7 nduj u3Sal9s uds y uojonpay ISION OINDSON E uoHonpay JB Y ADO Z Buey uoyezyueno au CL uolonpay SSION USalos PIAS LL sBuiyas uopnp y asion Penni anydepy 01 ejag eun7 euwolyo 6 uSaJos yids y pa POWN Wl 8 JOOYSISAO 19190 y apoy Suldwes Z Ploysaly1 118190 19M 4 9 juawea9ueyuy anxa Z jus E39 JOJO9 y s5uyjos 118390 e yoelg OapiA indu e PIEPUR S OSpIA Z Snore BULEO T DOV Japo9ag alqeuz uopun4 PUE g suondo 09pIA ewweg z UOI IAMOD ewweg suyos ewweg yuejg 1UBIy y qUelg ye7 yuejg WOHOY Z yuejg do MOPUIM ndu aanoy Sunuelg uonesinByuod 4104 9 p pue G p p p sabed 29S Ls J uueyp e uo lt 19 UJ gt SS Jd dnjag auueyy 1008 0 1d SIy 104 pauyep useq eney Jey
41. 4 Help Mouse Over Example tab highlight the menu option and press h B 3 Basic Operation This section discusses the primary tabs located along the top of the application window Each primary tab also has related secondary tabs which are located along the bottom of each tab as follows Main Tools Admin Advanced About e General e Virtual OSD e System e RTE Version e Status e Users e License e Lens Main Tools Admin About General e Virtual OSD e System Version e Status e Users License B 3 1 Main Tab General Under the Main tab select the General secondary tab to view general information about Inputs Channels Projector Information Test Pattern and Color Enable see Figure B 3 For detailed information refer to Section 3 Operation Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual B 3 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Appendix B Web UI CHAISTIE B 3 2 Main Tab Status Under the Main tab select the Status secondary tab to view the 12 Category LED status lights which indicate the projector s highest critical state The LED color of the category indicates that it is in one of the following states e Green Good e Yellow Warning e Red Error For more information about each LED click an LED button for details J a Alarms Configuration 2 2 Lamp Info Temperatures Figure B 5 Category Status Example B 3 3 Tools Tab Virtual OSD The Tools tab defaults to
42. 5 Set first device at address 0 to address to 5 65535 1001 ADR Query address for all devices and return results to address 1001 Expected response to previous query 01001 00005ADR 005 AGC AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Enable disable the Automatic Gain Control This control allows the decoder to automatically track the sync amplitude of the incoming signal Turn this control OFF if you are experiencing strange color artifacts indicating an incompatibility between the source and the AGC SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the AGC on Slot x Input y to the specified state of either enable or disable D 4 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference AGC AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL Cont d MAIN Set automatic gain control on main image PIIP Set automatic gain control on main image EXAMPLES AGC 1 Enable AGC on main video AGC MAIN 0 Disable AGC on main video AGC PIIP 1 Enable on PIP video AGC Returns the current AGC state on main video AGC PIIP Returns the current AGC state on PIP video AGC IN12 Returns the current AGC state on Slot 1 Input 2 AIC AUTO INPUT CYCLING CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION When enabled the system will con
43. 51 Maximum selection 3 50 Target Gamut CHAISTIE array 3 52 Target RGB values 3 50 Target White values 3 50 TCP Port 3 35 Test key remote keypad 3 3 Test Pattern 3 36 3 37 3 40 3 41 3 45 Test Pattern Color Swap 3 46 Test Pattern Enable 3 51 3 52 text editing 3 6 Texture Enhancement detail settings 3 28 Tiling Setup 3 44 Time setting 3 32 Tint color hue 3 23 Tri Level See clamp location troubleshooting changing display color 3 6 Troubleshooting Trees 6 9 to 6 11 Turn Off Image After min power manage ment 3 32 twin HDMI input card 2 3 U undershoot See input levels User White 3 56 V vertical frequency channel 3 12 Vertical keystone adjusting 3 37 vertical position See V Position 3 19 Vertical Shift Menu Preferences 3 32 Vertical Stretch 3 18 video decoder input card 2 4 Video Options menu 3 22 Video Standard 3 22 video standards use table 3 22 V Position 3 19 W WARNING message system 6 2 Web user interface B 1 to B 13 basic operation B 3 logging on B 1 navigating B 3 Weight 7 5 White test pattern 3 41 White Brightness Adjustment 3 52 White Color Temperature 3 50 White target adjusting using User presets 3 56 Wired Keypad Enabled 3 36 wired remote 3 3 Wx projector white CIE 1931 x capability 3 53 WY projector white CIE 1931 Y capability Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE 3 53 Inde
44. CON PIIP 500 C 2 1 Basic Message Structure The following component fields comprise a standard ASCII message Optional fields such as extra characters for special modes restrictions or added functionality are shown in italics with the exception of Notes Start and End of Message Every message begins with the left bracket character and ends with the right bracket character NOTE f the start character left bracket is received before an end character of the previous message the partial previous message is discarded Prefix Characters Optional For acknowledgement that the projector has responded and or to maximize message integrity insert one or two special characters before the 3 character Function code Special Description Character Simple Acknowledgment which will cause a character to be sent back from the projector when it has finished processing the message See C 2 4 Maximizing Message Integrity Full Acknowledgment which will cause an echo of the message as a reply to be sent back from the projector when it has finished processing the message See C 2 4 Maximizing Message Integrity amp Checksum which will allow a checksum to be put as the last parameter in the message for verifica tion at the projector See C 2 4 Maximizing Message Integrity Projector Numbers Optional To control a selected projector or controller within a group include its
45. D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE GOO GREEN ODD PIXEL OFFSET CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adds an offset to Input green black level settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLx0 Set a green black level offset for the second A to D EXAMPLE GOO SL10 10 Set a green black level offset to 10 on Slot 1 HDC DHDC DUAL LINK CONFIGURATION CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Select whether to use the 2 Inputs as separate Inputs or combined as a dual link Select Automatic to let the card decide based on the Input signal If the card cannot determine this it will assume 2 single links Valid values are 0 Automatic 1 2 Single Links 2 Dual Link SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLx0 Set a single dual link mode for the DHDIC EXAMPLES HDC SL10 0 Use Automatic detection for DHDIC on Slot 1 HDC SL40 1 Use 2 Single Links for DHDIC on Slot 4 HDC SL10 2 Use Dual link for DHDIC on Slot 1 HDC SL10 Get the current dual link mode for DHDIC on Slot 1 HLP SERIAL HELP CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Do
46. PIP window The Location settings will adjust the size and position of the window Blanking will not be affected While in split screen mode several channel controls that resize image will be disabled These controls are size H Position and V Position Valid values are 0 Top Right 1 Top Left 2 Bottom Left 3 Bottom Right SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE PPP 0 Select top right preset position PPS PIP SWAP CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control swaps the current main and PIP Inputs It will swap the Inputs regardless if there are valid signals on either of the Inputs SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE PPS Swap Inputs D 50 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference PRT SERIAL PORT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Status DESCRIPTION Gets the current serial port being used or gets a list of serial ports available on the device SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES PRT Gets current serial port PRT L Gets list of ports PTL SERIAL PROTOCOL CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Set the protocol for a serial communications port SUBCOD
47. SIPC 001 100686 xx J10 P12 P11 P10A PBP Backplane 00 0046 J13 P13 J1 J4 P2 J3 P1 o eve o EY o day o amp er Ethernet 0 RS422 GPIO RS232 RS232 IN IN OUT 39d 6 d Ord d 6er ovr est 6Sd 6sr 001 100730 xx 001 100730 xx Appendix A Interconnect Drawing J10 P10D Fan 2 Fan 1 _Ait inlet 001 111093 xxX et 001 100585 xx 001 100473 xx 001 100472 XX 001 111097 xx El XLR Status Display 001 100704 xx 002 100005 xx Wired IR Keypad CHRISTIE Appendix B Web User Interface B 1 Logging On IMPORTANT Before logging on to the system ensure that you select the appropriate language required Your language selection only affects the web user interface The language used by the projector s on screen display OSD is not affected See Figure B 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address in the address bar assigned to your projector 1 Select the appropriate language from the Language drop down list located in the upper left hand corner See Figure B 1 2 Type your user name and password in the User Name and Password see Figure B 2 fields respectively Both entries are case sensitive Login moa Fran ais Deutsch Espa ol Italiano PX BAS sto Password MUI Figure B 1 Language drop down list Figure B 2 Login Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual B 1 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Appendix B Web UI
48. SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enables or disables Aspect Ratio layer over Image layer SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES ARO 1 Turn ON Aspect Ratio Overlay ARO 0 Turn OFF Aspect Ratio Overlay ASH AUTO SHUTDOWN CONTROL GROUP Saved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION When Auto Shutdown Mode has been selected and no projector activity has been seen for the activation time out period the projector will enter a Power Saving mode in which the lamps will dim and the shutter close If this condition persists for an additional time out period the projector will automatically go to standby The presence of any activity within this is combined interval will cancel Auto Shutdown and return the projector to normal operation SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable or disable Auto Shutdown Operation Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 7 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE ASH AUTO SHUTDOWN SBTO Set the uninterrupted time out period that must elapse before projector will enter Standby Mode The second time out period or Standby time out ALTO Set the uninterrupted time out period that must elapse time of activity loss until Auto Shutdown is activated The first time out period or Activation time out EXAMPLES ASH 1 Turn ON Auto Shutdown Mode A
49. TIME EVENTS Cont d Monthly Occurring Event RTE T 2009 01 1 23 00 00 2010 01 01 M 1 description PWR 0 power off the projector on the Ist day of every month at 23 00 00 starting January 1 2009 until January 1 2010 inclusive RTE T 2009 01 10 23 00 00 2010 01 01 M 12 description PWR 0 power off the projector on the 12th day of every 12 months at 23 00 00 starting January 12 2009 until January 1 2010 inclusive RTE T 2009 01 31 23 00 00 2010 01 01 M 2 description PWR 0 power off the projector every other month on day 31 starting January 31 2009 until January 1 2010 inclusive Function Key Events RTE F 1 description LSH 0 open the shutter if Func 1 is pressed on the remote RTE F 2 description LSH 1 close the shutter if Func 2 is pressed on the remote DMX Events RTE M 55 description LSH 0 open the shutter when the DMX channel 55 is moved into the range of 192 255 RTE M 56 description LSH 1 close the shutter when the DMX channel 56 is moved into the range of 192 255 System Events RTE S 1 1 description CLE 5 change color to cyan when system powers up RTE S 6 25 description LSH 1 close the shutter if channel 25 is selected GPIO Events RTE G XXXXXXX description PWR 1 turn ON the projector if we receive any GPIO Input RTE G description PWR 1 turn ON the projector if we receive any GPIO Input RTE G XX descrip
50. Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 1 Labels and Marias id 1 1 1 2 Safety Warnings and G idelin g ai A A Os 1 1 1 3 Purchase Record and Service Contacts cccecceesceescessseceseceseeeeeeeeseecsaeceseeeeeeeeseecsaeeneeneeeeeaeees 1 2 1 4 PEE Oi 1 2 1 4 1 Projection Head Module PM is 1 3 Mata Power SUE tna 1 3 14 27 Electronics Mod le TEM asar diia diia 1 3 Input Pan l dias 1 3 Status DISplay aia 1 3 A E a ta ae edevacneeeaiesea i ees 1 3 A O ai cqaiie E N 1 3 LARES ALUN ai A EESE EREE 1 4 1 44 How the Projector W Oris ani EE EEEE REEE 1 4 1 45 EStor COMPONCINS rt lid 1 4 2 Setting Up a Source 2 Projector POWER 2 1 2 1 1 Turning the Projector ON adi 2 1 2 1 2 Disconnecting the Projector from AL 2 1 2 1 3 Re connecting the projector to AC cccecccecssessseceseceseeeeeeeeseeceaecnseeeeeeeeseecsuecneeseeeenseecsaeeees 2 2 2 2 Connecting Oo A E AREE 2 2 LEDS sti AN AN E E 2 2 DVI Digital Vid cios 2 3 Dial Link DVI Ip Card ina ia 2 3 Twin HDMI Input Card cece ceciecr ese cniedoieces wht emcee eae ncn ences nan em cates eden Games 2 3 Analog BNC Input Catal avale 2 4 Dual SD HD SDI Input Card aria tii 2 4 Video Decoder Input Card is eenei ena ee E EEE REELE EEEE AEAT EESE 2 4 2 3 How Color Settings Interact in a Entero Array a Ri Ai 2 5 2 4 Optimizing the Projectors for the Source ais da ies 2 6 3 Operation Sl Using th IR Romo ic 3 1 Sl dl AMIR REMOT eoe CS EE E ETE EE E T EA E E EE 3 2 EA E A E IE eae PE
51. and all electrical power ON PWRO Set the projector to standby mode PXP PIXEL PHASE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Pixel Phase adjusts the phase of the pixel sampling clock relative to the incoming signal This allows you to fine tune the sampling point within one pixel Adjust the Pixel Phase when the image usually from an RGB source shows shimmer NOTE If the shimmer is concentrated in vertical bands with little or no shimmer between the bands then it is likely that Pixel Tracking needs adjustment Pixel Tracking must be set correctly before adjusting Pixel Phase Pixel Phase can only be set on Analog Input cards The range is 0 31 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the pixel phase for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the pixel phase for the main image PIIP Set the pixel phase for the PIP image EXAMPLES PXP 16 Set pixel phase to 16 on main video PXP MAIN 16 Set pixel phase to 16 on main video PXP PIIP 16 Set pixel phase to 16 on PIP video PXP IN32 16 Set pixel phase to 16 on Slot 3 Input 2 PXP Returns the pixel phase value on main video PXP PIIP Returns the pixel phase value on PIP video PXP IN 12 Returns the pixel phase value on Slot 1 Input 2 D 52 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference PXT PIXEL TRACKING CON
52. and blacks in the image e Wide range video images should have content including white that extends to all edges of the image Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE i Section 3 Operation 3 4 2 Size and Position Menu To increase or decrease the size of your image change its proportion aspect ratio move the image to a specific area of the screen and refine other related Main Menu q a A y N i Size amp Position parameters select 1 Size and Position on the Main 14 Resize Presets Default y menu gt Size Ti Use Size and Position controls to match the image 3 Vertical Stretch Al m precisely to the screen used at the site Refer to 3 2 4 4 Pixel Track Co m Using Slide bars and Other Controls on page 3 8 if J Pixel Phase 3 eee you need help using any of the options and controls 6 H Position m Changes made in the Size and Position menu are 7 vePosition 0 m applied immediately and are saved when you exit the Bi 8 Keep Aspect On Auto Setup _ menu press EXIT or MENU 9 Blanking Custom Sizing Option The Custom re size option automatically appears in the Size and Position menu when any of the values for Size Vertical Stretch H Position V Position or Blanking do not correspond to those for a preset This option is not offered in the Resize Presets drop down list Resize Presets Resize Presets will display an
53. and the source is not a special case the video source where a default stretch is defined the source is scaled to fit the platform Secondary Blanking Refer to Blanking on page 3 20 Secondary Image Settings The controls adjust the secondary image in the same fashion as their counter parts in the Main gt Image Settings menu See 3 4 2 Size and Position Menu on page 3 17 5 Secondary Video Options Secondary Video Options 6 Secondary Input Levels 7 Secondary Advanced Image Settings The controls adjust the secondary image in the same fashion as their counter parts in the Main gt Image Settings gt Video Options menu See Video Options on page 3 22 Secondary Input Levels The controls adjust the secondary input levels in the same fashion as their counter parts in the Main gt Image Settings gt Input Levels menu See Input Levels on page 3 24 Secondary Advanced Image Settings The controls allow adjustment of Secondary Gamma Settings Secondary Detail Settings Secondary Noise reduction Settings and Secondary Color Settings These menus and controls function in the same fashion as their counterparts in the Main gt Image Settings gt gt Advanced Image Settings menus See Advanced Image Settings on page 3 26 IMPORTANT Use the Secondary Color Settings menu to set up color manually only if you override ArrayLOC Otherwise use ArrayLOC to manage projector color See Managing Colors with ArrayLOC on page 3 55
54. card type slot combination C 3 3 Access Levels e Operator Command is available at the operator level log in Advanced Command is available at the advanced operator level log in e Admin Command is available at the administrator level log in e Service Command is available at the service level log in C 8 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 ABL ARRAY BRIGHT COLOR LOC CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This command is used to set parameters that control how the Array Bright ColorLOC feature operates From this control you enable the mode in which you want to operate the feature target brightness target gamut update intervals and other miscellaneous parameters SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE EABL Enable Array Bright ColorLOC 0 OFF 1 fixed mode uses CCA only 2 cool mode uses CCA and LED control 3 bright mode uses CCA and multi LED control BRGP Brightness Group Identifies a subset of all projectors in the array to be used in the Array BCLOC algorithm May be used to provide multiple groups of projectors with different color targets 0 9999 BRTG Brightness Target Sets the target brightness that the projectors in the array brightness group should meet 0 1000 Lum
55. chroma color In the image increasing the luma delay will move luma seen as a shadow where colors overlap to the right slightly with colors remaining in place Decreasing this delay will move the shadow slightly to the left If necessary for your current source adjust so that no shadows occur with adjacent colors Adaptive Contrast Dynamically expands the contrast of the output image producing vibrant images with seamless response to scene changes and fades The slide bar adjusts the amount of adaptive contrast to apply with a setting of 0 producing no change Adaptive contrast is disabled when the Dynamic Iris is operating in Dynamic mode Split Screen This control allows a snap shot of the main image to be presented on the right side or lower part of the screen to allow evaluation of advanced image processing features All resizing controls are honoured on both images However image processing controls such as Detail Sharpness Noise Reduction and Adaptive Contrast only happen on the left side or top image Changing inputs channels or test patterns will disable this control PIP operation must be disabled prior to enabling this control Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 23 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 RGB Quantization Range This control defines the RGB quantization levels for digital DVI and HDMI inputs using the RGB color space Typically graphic sources use the full range of levels for the given bit depth
56. command will control the writing and reading of 2D keystone maps warp maps edge blend map uniformity maps and associated parameters NOTE The commands below are used from the OSD only and are not highly applicable for use from Serial Commands If they are set they will only be applied on Power up or if applying them from the OSD NOTE WRP cannot be used if TIL is enabled SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Select Warping mode 0 disabled 1 2D keystone 2 TWIST maps HKST 1D Horizontal keystone adjust VKST 1D Vertical keystone adjust KRST Reset keystone settings to zero KTLH 2D keystone adjust Top Left H position KTLV 2D keystone adjust Top Left V position KTRH 2D keystone adjust Top Right H position KTRV 2D keystone adjust Top Right V position KBLH 2D keystone adjust Bottom Left H position KBLV 2D keystone adjust Bottom Left V position Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 73 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE WRP WARP KEYSTONE Cont d KBRH 2D keystone adjust Bottom Right H position KBRV 2D keystone adjust Bottom Right V position EXAMPLES WRP SLCT 0 Warping disabled WRP SLCT 1 Use 2D keystone mode WRP SLCT 2 Use TWIST map 1 WRP KTLH 75 Set 2D keystone Top left Horizontal position to 75 D 74 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012
57. current color if a certain color is enabled Input Levels Auto Input Level Adjust corresponding Red lt Pr gt Blacklevel lie blacklevel red green or blue until one Red lt Pr gt Input Drive black band appears Green lt Y gt Blacklevel 9 Green lt Y gt Input Drive 6 Blue lt Pb gt Blacklevel Adjust corresponding Blue lt Pb gt Input Drive ml Input drive red green Auto Color Enable ou or blue until one amo LOCO BackPorch z bright band appears Input Peak Detector E Color Enable White Figure 3 7 Adjusting Input Levels Using the Peak Detector 5 Check the black band and adjust the black level slide bar if necessary NOTE Adjusting the black level affects the gain Only adjust when necessary 6 Repeat steps 3 5 with the two remaining primary colors When each primary color shows one optimized black band and white or colored band the input levels for this source are correctly set Upon exiting the Input Levels menu the Peak Detector check box will clear NOTES 1 Input levels apply to the current source only but for any color temperature used 2 If color temperature is set up based on the internal test patterns you can set up input levels for a given source so that they match the color temperature of the internal test patterns Advanced Image Settings Use the Advanced Image Settings submenu to make the adjustments for z pi e Advanced Image Settings lesser used but more specialized app
58. damaged Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHRISTIE 5 2 6 Preventative Maintenance Section 5 Maintenance e NU ile Ni The projector is a class 2M source of visible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye hazard Table 5 1 Preventative Maintenance Part Description Frequency Action Projection Lens As required Clean A small amount of dust on the lens has very little effect on picture quality Clean only if absolutely necessary Dust Brush most of the dust from the lens with a camel hair brush or blow dust away with a dust free blower 1 Fold a microfibre cloth smooth and gently wipe remaining dust particles from the lens Wipe evenly with the smooth portion of the cloth that has no folds or creases DO NOT apply pressure with your fingers use the tension in the folded cloth itself to collect dust 2 Ifsignificant dust is still bound to the surface dampen a clean microfibre cloth with coated optics cleaning solution damp not dripping Wipe gently until clean Projection Lens As required Fingerprints smudges or oil 1 Brush away most of the dust with a camel hair brush and or blow away using a dust free blower 2 Rolla lens tissue around a swab and soak it in coated optics cleaning solution Tissue should be damp
59. disable this control PIP operation must be disabled prior to enabling this control e Full Screen Eye Motion Filter Checking this control applies the eye motion filter to the entire screen rather than applying just to the edge blending regions e Eye Motion Filter Adjust this filter to reduce saccadic eye motion artifacts sometimes noticeable in edge blending regions Too much filtering may result in loss of detail For best results adjust this setting while positioned at the nominal screen viewing distance Color Settings IMPORTANT Use this Color Settings menu to set up color manually only if you override ArrayLOC See Managing Colors with ArrayLOC on page 3 55 Color Settings 1 Select Color Adjustment Max Drives al ArrayLOC is enabled automatically and Select Color Adjustment is set to Max Drives Use the color function under ArrayLOC to manage projector color ArrayLOC color and color temperature settings override settings in this menu NOTE 7o check ArrayLOC operational status check Main Menu gt Status ArrayLOC can only be disabled from the passcode protected Service menu Please contact Customer Support for more information e Select Color Adjustment Select the output color adjustment most suited to this input signal The options include the following e Max Drives All color adjustments are turned off allowing the projector to run at maximum brightness SD Video and HD Video Sets the output color to
60. down list 1 Select the file type Logo or Gamma from the Upload drop down list NOTE f you select a Logo file type it MUST be a 24 bit bitmap file This enables the Logo Position and Background Color section Proceed to Step 3a If you select a Gamma file type it MUST be a csv file with 1024 values all colors same or 1024 x 3 for individual colors This enables the Gamma Properties section Proceed to Step 4a a Enter the Logo position for the X and Y fields Click the Color square to open the Choose Background Color window choose the desired background color from the color palette and click OK The color square changes to the selected color c Click the Upload button to display the Logo Upload window Click Yes or No to confirm or cancel the upload An Upload in Progress window appears Click the Upload Browse button to open the Choose file window Locate and select the file you wish to upload from a Network drive location or from your hard drive Click the Upload button to display the Logo Upload window a Enter a descriptive name in the Display Name field b Click the Upload button to display the Gamma Upload window Click Yes or No to confirm or cancel the upload respectively An Upload in Progress window appears Creating a Backup File 1 2 Select a file type All Preferences Configuration Channels or Users from the Backup drop down list Click Backup to initiate the download A Backup in Progr
61. ee eS 3 3 3 1 3 IR Remote Commands td 3 3 A E EE 3 3 TESE aaa E A E E E E 3 3 AUO ee E E E A ON E E E ER 3 3 A O E E REA 3 4 E A erae E A RA R A E A 3 4 DUT ee E E E ESE 3 4 A eeu easel EREU 3 4 WAL EEE A A E 3 4 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Table of Contents CHAISTIE IM LS cass ec nes cee ae cetera pec pers nce ee eee cena deep ee eee E E S 3 4 BOSE oo ee ees 3 5 Sn E A E E toa ve veneers eaten 3 5 Number KEYS iS 3 5 A PP A A A 3 5 HD in ii 3 5 o 5 ease aca ee eta R A E ae eae 3 5 OSD On screen ISLAS Di eat 3 5 A E AN A moan muon aero 3 6 PUIG Keri A a UA 3 6 A E R R AE Genes sncin E A EE 3 6 A II EA 3 6 a A on A O O PEO OO en er eer eee 3 7 AROS Re 3 7 A A E 3 7 3 2 Navigating the Memis iia rss 3 7 3 21 MA O RA AOS 3 7 322 On line Hol ds 3 8 SL Mhe Global o pis 3 8 3 2 4 Using Slide bars and Other Comtral sa cisisnscsassesatnesscnsvasannncencdsionsaeacedandeeosneasduasstessaeananewaeannnss 3 8 3 2 3 Editing Tias 3 9 3 3 Using Jnp ts and MAMA 3 10 3 3 1 OPUS iii id 3 10 SO ASAS sesters in enei eraa R EEE E Oi 3 10 32 ia 3 11 Creating a New Channel a 3 12 Using a Cmos 3 12 Channel Setup Men a e A io 3 12 AI A EREKE E EEEE ERA 3 13 Copying a Chameleon 3 14 D leting a Chama 3 14 To Delete Multiple Chameleon 3 14 Editing a Crea cesta mete 3 15 Channel Edit RSI ri ancis E E a aE T aia ei 3 15 SA Adj sting th IMa pe A 3 16 SAN Automatic A nn E ENEK E 3 16 3 4 2 Size a
62. flags column with lt Target The Flags column uses several characters to identify projectors within the array The least red projector is identified with a lowercase r The least green projector is identified with a lowercase g The least blue projector is identified with a lowercase b 3 52 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHRISTIE The dimmest projector is identified with a lowercase w Section 3 Operation The projector with white brightness capability less than Target brightness is identified with an uppercase W e Any projector with broadcast mode enabled is identified with an asterisk if broadcasting to its Bright Color group eThe Proj ID column shows the projector array ID The Group column shows the projector Bright Color group The WBA column shows the projector white brightness adjustment The Rx Ry and RY columns show the red CIE 1931 x CIE 1931 y and CIE 1931 Y capability of the projector The Y capability is the product Y grossed up intensity of the projector and its current red duty cycle on time The Gx Gy GY Bx By and BY columns show the green and blue capability of the projector The Wx Wy and WY show the white capability of the projector The white capability of the pro jector is calculated as the sum of the red green and blue capability scaled by the current duty cycle of the projector ArrayLOC Status Filter Use this option to spec
63. for Slot 3 Input 2 BKY BROADCAST KEY MODE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Toggle Broadcast Key Mode to select whether all key presses received by the projector will be relayed to all other projectors on the network SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set to 1 to enable EXAMPLES BKY 1 Enable Broadcast Key BKY 0 Disable Broadcast Key BKY Get current Broadcast key state BLB BLUE BLACK LEVEL CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Blue black level is used to compensate for relative variations in the black levels between Red Green and Blue This is available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting achieves maximum contrast without crushing white or black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made for each signal SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the blue black level on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 D 12 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference
64. gamma table that has been downloaded to the projector S S Fas standard E E NOTE 4 separate PC utility is needed to do this 2 2 f 5 5 The 2 22 curve is a power curve typically used to encode graphics o and video sources See Figure 3 8 The standard curve auto setup Signal Input Level Signal Input Level default is a modified 2 22 curve with a small linear section in the Figure 3 8 Gamma Curve black that enhances the detail in darker areas of the projected content Typically standard or 2 22 is used for all sources Alternatively if neither default is ideal apply a simple gamma curve by defining a custom power function and slope Select Custom to enable the function and slope controls For more complex non standard gamma curves a user defined curve created externally and downloaded to the projector can be used requires separate PC based Arbitrary Gamma software application to create the table and the Web UI to download it NOTE f any of these special user curves have been installed their names will appear in the Gamma Table drop down list Gamma Function Defines the base gamma power curve used when the base gamma table value is set to custom This value combined with gamma slope setting determines the base gamma table to be used as the custom base table The curve is generally a power curve with a small linear segment at the bottom defined by the slope Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 27 020 100367
65. gt EXAMPLES FAS 1 Turn ON fan assist FAS 0 Turn OFF fan assist FIL FILTER CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Apply an internal Low Pass Filter to the current Input signal before the A D conversion in analog cards This removes high frequency noise from Input signals HDTV is typically used for 720p and 10801 video sources The high bandwidth filter should be used for 1080p or higher frequency sources Valid values are 0 OFF 2 HDTV 1 HDTV High Bandwidth 3 EDTV 4 SDTV SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the filter for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the filter for Main video PIIP Set the filter for PIP video EXAMPLES FIL 2 Set the filter for main video to HDTV FIL MAIN 2 Set the filter for main video to HDTV FIL IN32 2 Set the filter for Slot 3 Input 2 to HDTV Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 27 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE FLE FRAME LOCK ENABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control enables or disables Frame Lock which controls how the projector controls the output frame timing based on the Input signal When set to Frame Lock output image frames are locked to the Input if possible When locked the output is always locked to the primary Input never the PIP image Free Run sets the output to c
66. i e 8 bit 10 bit 12 bit and consumer electronics CE products typically use a limited range of data within the given bit depth This control must be set to limited to correct the levels for those CE products that use the limited space This adjusts what is considered black and white levels in the image As an example for 8 bit space full range RGB uses levels O black to 255 white A limited CE range is 16 235 for 8 bit video sources Input Levels brightness settings are near 50 and that color temperature is properly set up on an internal grey scale test pattern Good RGB or input levels that is the drives and black levels for each of the three colors red green and blue ensure that images from analog Blue lt Pb gt Blacklevel 3 Blue lt Pb gt Input Drive 255 Auto Color Enable v Input Levels Turn OFF before Only experienced users should use the 1 Auto Input Level O leaving menu Input Levels submenu The projector 2 Red lt Pr gt Blacklevel 3 automatically optimizes input levels for all 3 Red lt Pr gt Input Drive 255 but the B Pe of a E 4 Green lt Y gt Blacklevel 3 eves alti starting check that overall contrast an automatically 5 Green lt Y gt Input Drive 255 and correctly 6 m 8 10 Input Peak Detector sources other than decoded video have 11 Color Enable White y maximum contrast without crushing black or white By default and in an Auto Setup the projector automaticall
67. into a wired remote using the optional cable Connect one end into the standard IR remote and the other to the XLR connector labeled Remote on the Electronics Module The wired remote is recommended when the lighting conditions are unsuitable for proper IR transmission To use the wired remote make sure that wired remote support is enabled on the projector the remote is connected to Main Menu gt Configuration gt Communications gt Wired Keypad Enabled To use the wired remote to control multiple projectors in an ArrayLOC network ensure that wired remote support is enabled on the controlling projector and make sure that key synchronization is enabled on the controlling projector and on all the receiving projectors Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt ArrayLOC Configuration gt Synchronize Keys Test Pattern Color Enable NOTE Batteries are not required for the wired remote projector control to operate however if the laser pointer is required batteries must be installed in the remote IR Remote Commands Specific keypad commands are explained Ye eile The projector is a class 2M source of visible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard Power ON OFF Press and hold POWER for 2 seconds or press twice quickly to power the projector ON or OFF Or press and release P
68. level for PIP video to 0 IRE VBL Returns the video black level on main video VRT VERTICAL POSITION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control sets the vertical position of the image SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the vertical position for the main image EXAMPLE VRT 500 Set vertical position to 500 on main video VRT Returns the vertical position value on main video D 72 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference VST VERTICAL STRETCH CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Use Vertical Stretch to adjust the height of the image while keeping the width constant This controls how much the image is electronically stretched vertically As it does not affect the horizontal width it changes the aspect ratio of the image 1000 is the neutral position where no stretching is done Vertical Scale VST Value 1000 SIZ Value 1000 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the vertical stretch for the main image EXAMPLES VST 500 Set vertical stretch to 500 on main video VST Returns the vertical stretch value on main video WRP WARP KEYSTONE CONTROL GROUP Configuration Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This serial
69. level on Ethernet all ports PRTA Set the access level on port A RS 232 In PRTB Set the access level on port B RS 232 Out PRTC Set the access level on port C RS 422 EXAMPLES RAL 0 Disable remote serial protocol access level for all Ethernet ports RAL Get access level for Ethernet ports RAL 0 RAL PRTA 2 Set remote serial protocol access level on port A RS 232 In to free access RAL PRTA Get access level RAL PRTA 2 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 53 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE RBL RIGHT BLANKING CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the number of lines to blank turn to black at the right of the image This can be used to blank out any unwanted data near the right edge of the image A positive amount of blanking makes the image smaller A negative amount of blanking makes the image larger Negative blanking is only applicable to analog signals when the auto setup has not been able to set the image size correctly It is preferable not to use negative blanking but to run auto setup again ensuring that the content has active pixels on each edge of the image The maximum amount of right blanking allowed is half the image width minus 10 For negative blanking the image size can only be increased to the limit of the sync SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the
70. matched for their primary colors and overall light output proper adjustment of Brightness Uniformity can create an exceptionally smooth screen in which e No area of the screen appears brighter than another Light output from one screen closely matches adjacent screens Although the Brightness Uniformity control can be used for a stand alone projector it is particularly useful for setting up and maintaining tiled images that form a cohesive display wall in which the color cast and light output appear uniform throughout each image as well as throughout the entire wall The procedure provided here assumes a multiple screen application Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 39 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation IMPORTANT Before You Begin NOTE Brightness uniformity cannot be adjusted for images that have been warped using Main Menu gt Configuration gt Geometry and Color gt Geometry Correction CHAISTIE Read through the entire procedure before attempting to adjust Brightness Uniformity controls and keep in mind the following checklist of prerequisites and guidelines Adjust Brightness Uniformity 1 Before attempting to work with Brightness Uniformity ensure that primary colors color temperature and brightness output are all well matched from one screen to another These matches are needed before you can achieve good brightness uniformity results See Managing Colors with ArrayLOC on page 3 55
71. may be necessary only for blending a 2 x 2 projector display because of blending differences for the sides and center 7 Use Reset Black Level Blending Settings to undo the settings made in the previous steps NOTES 1 The menu options vary depending on the edge blending parameters 2 You may need to re adjust the black level brightnesses following the overlap adjustments on each blended edge 3 When adjusting 6 or more projectors you need to ensure that the hue and brightness of each target area is matched at closely as possible Tiling Setup Image tiling allows a single input image to be spread over multiple screens with each screen displaying a fraction of the image Entero projectors support up to a 3 x 3 tiled array for example 1 x 2 3 x 1 and 2 x 3 Projectors are numbered from left to right left column 1 and from top to bottom Top row 1 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE i Section 3 Operation On each projector you must set the following The tiling array size sets the total rows and total columns This setting will be the same on all the projectors in the array The relative location of the projector within the array sets the row number and column number for each projector Tiling can be enabled or disabled by selecting the Tiling Setup check box and you will not lose any of the above settings The features that act differently when Tiling is
72. multiple Ethernet sessions input on one Ethernet session will be relayed to all other Ethernet sessions as well as to the RS 232 and RS 422 ports Ethernet Settings NOTE Recommended for network administrators only IP Address Enter a valid and unique IP address for use on the network to which the projector is currently connected This address will overwrite any previous IP address such as the factory defined projector default It takes approximately 10 seconds for the projector to respond at its new address TCP Port On some Ethernet networks firewall restrictions may require that the port number of the projector be changed from its default of 3002 If so enter a new valid port number here It is highly recommended not to use a port number below 1000 as these ports are typically reserved for and used by common IP applications Subnet Mask Subnet Mask determines the subnet for the IP address and must be set manually Default Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway used to reach any non local IP addresses and it must be set manually Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 35 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i Host Name Set the hostname for the device Domain Name Set the domain for the device MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the projector read only Broadcast Keys Use Broadcast Keys to relay all key presses received by the projector to all other projectors on
73. near a swimming pool e Do not operate in extremely humid environments e Do not place the projector on an unstable cart stand or table A projector and cart combination must be used with care Sudden stops excessive force and uneven surfaces may cause the projector and cart combination to overturn Servicing All servicing must be performed by CHRISTIE accredited service technicians Use replacement parts that are manufacturer approved only Use of any other part other than the ones specified by the manufacturer can result in fire electric shock or risk of personal injury and irreparable equipment damage Do not service the projector while it is still connected There are exposed voltages that could cause severe physical injuries and possibly death Always disconnect the projector and wait two minutes to allow the power supply capacitors to electrically discharge before removing the projector covers If any of the following conditions exist immediately disconnect the projector from the power outlet and consult a CHRISTIE accredited service technician The power cord is damaged The internal cooling fans do not turn ON when the projector is first powered up Liquid is spilled into the projector The projector is exposed to excessive moisture The projector is not operating normally or performance has significantly deteriorated in a short period of time The projector has been dropped or the shipping case if applicable is badly
74. of 3 0 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the interpolated gamma level EXAMPLES GAM 100 Set gamma to 1 0 curve GAM Returns current gamma curve GIA ANALOG BNC GROUNDED INPUT SELECTION CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the Input signal grounding method to single ended or differential Valid values are 0 Differential default 1 Single ended SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLxy Set the Input signal grounding method for the specified Slot and Input EXAMPLES GIA SL31 1 Set grounding on Slot 3 Input 1 to single ended GIA SL11 Returns the current grounding method of Slot 1 Input 1 D 30 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference GID VIDEO DECODER GROUNDED INPUT SELECTION CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the Input signal grounding method to single ended or differential Valid values are 0 Differential default 1 Single ended SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLxy Set the Input signal grounding method for the specified Slot and Input EXAMPLES GID SL31 1 Set grounding on Slot 3 Input 1 to single ended GID SL16 Returns the current grounding method of Slot 1 Input 6 GIO GENERAL PURPOSE INPUT OUTPUT CONTROL GROUP C
75. on page 3 48 If any of these values is less than 100 there is at least one projector in the array that cannot achieve target values Reducing Target Color Space and RGB Brightness Target values in the master projector will bring the Array Capability values closer to 100 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 3 Operation Fine Tune Whites White Brightness or Primary Colors Projector Color Adjustment Projector Color Adjustment lets you fine tune color or Ene AR al brightness for individual projectors that don t quite match the 2 Red Part Of Red 100 0 array For more information see Projector Color Adjustment on MIRRA O 0 0 page 3 51 4 Blue Part Of Red O 00 These steps outline color adjustments using projector color 3 Groen Parte ad Red Part Of Green O 0 0 settings until the colors appear to match the rest of the projectors 7 Blue Part Of Green 00 in the array Color adjustments are evaluated by eye A color a oa 1000 meter can help determine the change required but the results are Red Part OF Blue 00 still evaluated by eye For information about using the color meter AAA 00 with this procedure see Fine tune Projector Colors With a Color Repay Waits 100 0 Meter on page 3 58 112 Green Part Of White 100 0 1 Navigate to Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Blue part cot eam E A Clear Adjustments Projector Color A
76. on the setting of the Color Temperature control Color temperature is expressed in degrees Kelvin 3200 5400 etc Lower numbers give a reddish white higher numbers appear bluish There are 4 standard settings 9300K is close to the white of many computer monitors 6500K is the standard for color video in both standard and high definition forms 5400K is a standard for graphics and black and white video 3200K is useful if the projected image is to be filmed or shot as part of a studio set that is illuminated with incandescent lights For all color temperatures the color primaries red green amp blue are unchanged and reflect the native colors of the projector 2 SD Video Optimized for SD video This will allow you to adjust the color of red green and blue as well as the color white 3 HD Video Optimized for HD video This will allow you to adjust the color of red green and blue as well as the color of white 4 User 1 Selects a user defined sets of color adjustments 5 User 2 Selects a user defined sets of color adjustments 6 User 3 Selects a user defined sets of color adjustments 7 User 4 Selects a user defined sets of color adjustments The set of 4 User Defined settings are defined in the configuration menu SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Select the color temp setting for Slot x Input y MAIN Select the color temp setting for main video PIIP Select the color temp setting for PIP
77. preset 4 ROFR Red part of red 0 255 GOFR Green part of red 0 255 BOFR Blue part of red 0 255 ROFG Red part of green 0 255 GOFG Green part of green 0 255 BOFG Blue part of green 0 255 ROFB Red part of blue 0 255 GOFB Green part of blue 0 255 BOFB Blue part of blue 0 255 RGBB Controls overall brightness of LEDs 0 1000 percentage with one decimal place COPY Copies color mode settings from an existing preset to the current preset Values 1 Copy from Native 4 Copy from User 2 2 Copy from EBU 5 Copy from User 3 3 Copy from User 1 6 Copy from User 4 EXAMPLE RGB ROFR 128 Set Red of Red value RGB BOBB Get Blue of Blue value RGB RGBB 500 Set overall brightness to 50 RGB CLRM 4 Select user preset 2 RGB COPY 2 Copy EBU preset values to current preset Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference ROG RED ODD PIXEL GAIN CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adds an offset to Input red gain settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLx0 Set a red gain offset for the second A to D EXAMPLE ROG SL10 1
78. right blanking for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the right blanking for the main image PIIP Set the right blanking for the PIP image EXAMPLES RBL 40 Set right blanking to 40 on main video RBL MAIN 40 Set right blanking to 40 on main video RBL PIIP 40 Set right blanking to 40 on PIP video RBL IN32 40 Set right blanking to 40 on Slot 3 Input 2 RBL Returns the right blanking value on main video RBL PIIP Returns the right blanking value on PIP video RBL IN 12 Returns the right blanking value on Slot 1 Input 2 RDB RED BLACK LEVEL CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Red black level is used to compensate for relative variations in the black levels between Red Green and Blue Available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting is when the maximum contrast is achieved without crushing white or black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made for each signal SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the red black level on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 D 54 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05
79. sjouueyo 84 JO 18 JO JS E S SIYL sBunjes ewl sBunjas a6eu paduenpy siena du suondo oapi aoeds 10 09 ssoujybug jseuog TOON N uonISod Y 9ZIS Buryuelg dnjas ojny uo padsy dasy UOI ISOd YORI 9XId 49 24 S eos azis S S ld 9ZISOY KH NGYUOGN AD UlSHed 1891 6 abenBue7 g Bulyoyms 3 yndu 1epuosas 7 snes 9 uOyeImbyuoy y dnjas jauueyo g sBumes sbeu z UO ISOd Y 8ZIS nua urew 4 3 Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHRISTIE Menu Tree Section 4 4 1 1 MENU TREE CONTINUED CONFIGURATION a qeuz 10 09 EL 9 qeuz 10109 oyny Z ploysaly 10 99 9q 997 LL 10 99 98q eaa7 ndu OL D0 Meuy El 40 9 p 9Bey 89S ul paBBnid spies yoyew zey sodA YM pal aq IM nuay p129 indu ONg Bojeuy y pep indu WGH UML p129 indu GS GH Iena Z pues ndu Japooaq O PIA L sBunjyas p1eg uodo a08s DOT eUY SL seyd 9XId 6 JOSHO SSEUYd I9XId PPO 8 uteg 9XId PPO N g Z uleg 9XId PPO U39319 9 uleg 9XId PPO P9Y G JOSHO 9XId PPO SNIE y Z MANO 40 apow XL y JOSHO 9XId PPO U93919 e 4 JOSHO I9XId PPO P9Y Z z dul 104 suru CICS Bulpunolg JoJ9auuoy L indyno 104 pow XL Z pes
80. source 1 S Video source Luma Y connected to 4 Sy and Chroma C connected to 6 Sc 1 YPbPr source component signal on 4 Pr 5 Y amp 6 Pb 2 4 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 2 Setting Up a Source 2 3 The video decoder Input card has 8 LED indicators The PWR LED indicates that the module is installed properly and has been successfully configured The YPbPr LED indicates that a valid component signal has been detected on inputs 4 5 and 6 Component Input grouping must also be selected in the projector menu Refer to Section 3 Operation The remaining LEDs are each associated with one of the inputs and indicate that a valid signal has been detected on that input Video Decoder Input 108 310101 01 o o o o o o o 0 1 CVBS 2 SVID 3 SVID 4 Pr R Sy 5 Y G 6 Pb B Sc CVBS CVBS CVBS How Color Settings Interact in a Entero Array Image Settings gt Color Space tells the projector how to interpret video data coming in See Color Space on page 3 21 Image Settings gt Advanced Image Settings gt Color Settings adjusts the color temperature Use ArrayLOC color and color temperature settings instead When enabled ArrayLOC overrides the settings on the Color Settings menu See Color Settings on page 3 29 Configuration gt Geometry amp Color gt Manual RGB Adjustment is the manual way to set the levels of each LED These adjustments are available when A
81. the 2 hexadecimal digits C 2 2 Sample Messages and their Meaning For a Single Projector Message Format Function Example Code Data SET set contrast of main image to 500 CON500 Code Subcode Data SET set contrast of PIP image to 500 CON PIIP500 Code REQUEST what is current contrast CON Code Subcode REQUEST what is contrast of PIP image CON PIIP Code Data REPLY contrast is 64 CON 64 Code Subcode Data REPLY PIP contrast is 64 CON PIIP 64 Code Data SET AND ACKNOWLEDGE MESSAGE message processed CON64 Code Subcode Data Checksum SET WITH CHECKSUM amp CON64 240 Message Format Function Example Dest Addr Code Data SET turn projector 5 on Spwrl Dest Addr Code Data SET AND ACKNOWLEDGE MESSAGE message processed ffr55 5pwrl For a Specific Projector within a Network with Multiple Controllers present Message Format Function Example Dest Addr Src Code REQUEST get contrast from projector 5 to controller 2 5 2con Dest Addr Src Code Data SET AND ACKNOWLEDGE MESSAGE is message from controller 5 2con 2 processed by projector 5 Dest Addr Src Code Data REPLY from projector 5 to controller 2 contrast is 64 002 005con 064 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHK IS TIE Appendix C Serial Command Overview C 2 3 What is Actu
82. the 4 letter subcode will be added on to the Command code A number of optional features message acknowledges checksums and network addressing can be included Generally most commands include 0 or 1 data fields or parameters Where applicable a message may expand to include additional parameters of related details The smallest step size for any parameter is always 1 For some controls i e Size the value displayed on the screen has a decimal point e g 0 200 to 4 000 In this case the values used for the serial communications is an integer value e g 200 to 4000 not the decimal value seen on the screen Regardless of message type or origin all messages use the same basic format and code Opening and closing round brackets parentheses surround each message refer to Table C 1 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual C 1 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Appendix C Serial Command Overview CH IS TIE Table C 1 Message Formats SOURCE MESSAGE FORMAT FUNCTION EXAMPLES From Controller Code Data SET set contrast of main image to 500 CONS00 or CON 500 Code Subcode Data SET set contrast of PIP image to 500 CON PIIP500 or CON PIIP 500 From Controller Code REQUEST what is current contrast CON or CON Code Subcode REQUEST what is contrast of PIP image CON PIIP or CON PIIP From Projector Code Data REPLY contrast is 500 CON 500 Code Subcode Data REPLY PIP contrast is 500
83. the network Front IR Enabled Check this option to enable the front IR sensor 8 Front IR Enabled gt Wired Keypad Enabled Check this option to use the wired keypad 10 Wired Keypad Enabled Uv G try amp Col eometry Lolor Geometry amp Color In the Configuration menu select the Geometry and I 4 Test Pattern Off sa Color submenu when you need to modify overall color performance and or image geometry for straightforward 2 Geometry Correction alignment of flat screens 3 Brightness Uniformity 4 Edge Blending 5 Array Color Target Test Pattern Choose the desired internal test pattern or select OFF y i to turn off a test pattern Alternatively use the TEST key MY Projector Color Adjustment to cycle through test patterns 7 Black Level Blending Geometry Correction NOTE Geometry correction is not available when Tiling is enabled 10 Tiling Setup Keystone is typically caused by tilting the projector in relation to the screen so that the lens surface and screen are no longer parallel to each other Use the projector menu options to make basic keystone adjustments appropriate for flat screens 3 36 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 3 Operation Settings to adjust keystone are in the Geometry Correction submenu Brightness Uniformity Edge Blending and Black Level Blending should be disabled before performing Keystone adjustmen
84. time either from 1 card or from 2 cards These 2 inputs can be routed to outputs or to the main or PIP video image NOTE Use only high quality shielded cables for all connections LEDS LEDs are located on the faceplate of each Input card and indicate the following e Power ON Green e Signal Valid Green e Signal Invalid OFF Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHK IS TIE Section 2 Setting Up a Source DVI Digital Video Use the DVI I connector to connect either analog or digital video devices to the projector Use a cable with DVI I connectors at both ends to connect devices that transmit digital and analog video signals such as high quality DVD players satellite receivers and digital cable TVs e NOTE For true digital output from devices that transmit digital signals connect to the DVI I connector Dual Link DVI Input Card This card accepts a single DVI signal over a DVI I connector and analog video signals over the DVI I or 15 pin VGA connector The module can simultaneously support a digital signal on the DVI input and an analog signal on the VGA port however it does not support 2 analog signals at the same time There are 4 LEDs on the module faceplate PWR indicates that power is applied and the card is initialized and the other three LEDs on the right side of the corresponding connectors indicate that a valid signal has been detected Dual Link DVI Input 108 312101 01 5
85. to group the last 3 BNC connectors Input 4 5 6 on a Video Decoder Input Card valid options are 0 3 CVBS sources 1 1 SVideo Source 1 CVBS source 2 1 YPrPb Component source SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLx0 Set a grouping mode for the last 3 BNC connectors on Video Decoder card in the selected Slot EXAMPLES GMS SL10 0 Use 3 BNC connectors for CVBS source GMS SL10 1 Use 3 BNC connectors for 1 SVideo and 1 CVBS sources GMS SL10 2 Use 3 BNC connectors for 1 YPbPr component source GMS SL10 Get the current mode setting GNB GREEN BLACK LEVEL CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Green black level is used to compensate for relative variations in the black levels between Red Green and Blue This is available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting achieves maximum contrast without crushing white or black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made for each signal SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the green black level on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 MAIN Set the green black level on the main vi
86. whites and blacks in the image e Wide range video images should have content including white that extends to all edges of the image Channel Select a specific source setup channel defined and stored in projector memory Once you hit the CHANNEL key and enter a two digit channel number or if there is a list displayed highlight it and press ENTER the display will automatically change and update according to the numerous setup parameters defined for that channel For more information about channels inputs and slots see 3 3 Using Inputs and Channels on page 3 10 NOTE 4 new channel is automatically created if you adjust an image from a new source 2 Channel key behavior during a presentation depends on whether or not the Display Channel List option is enabled in the Menu Preferences menu You can choose to use a scrollable list of channels when you press Channel or you may prefer to enter the desired channel number blind i e without on screen feedback See Menu Preferences discussed later in this section Slot 1 2 3 4 Press a SLOT key to select the input card in that slot Press the SLOT key again to display the next active INPUT on the card Press a different SLOT key to select a different input card For more information about channels inputs and slots see 3 3 Using Inputs and Channels on page 3 10 Input Displays all inputs in all slots both Active and Inactive Press INPUT once and scroll through the list to sel
87. window too Upload Backup G Restore Qe ae Interrogate J lH Upgrade Tooltip Hide _ 1 A Restore section allows you B to select the file and file type that you wish to restore Backup section allows you e to select the file and file type that you wish to backup Upload section allows you to select the file and file type that you wish to upload D Logo Position and E Background Color section is enabled when you select a Logo file type from the Upload section Gamma Properties section F is enabled when you select a Gamma file type from the Upload section Sync button is used to set the projector date and time to match that on your computer G Upload Backup Restore H and Interrogator buttons perform their respective functions after the setting for the function have first been selected from the drop down lists and other fields on the left Upgrade button refer to the Visual Environments Projector Software Upgrade instruction sheet P N 020 100443 xx This button is disabled if the projector is not in Standby mode Hide button allows you to disable the display of the help text Entero R PMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 B 8 Aprenda Bee ISS CHRISTIE Uploading a Logo File or Gamma File Important The projector must be powered on to enable the Upload drop
88. 0 Set a red gain offset to 10 on Slot 1 ROO RED ODD PIXEL OFFSET CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adds an offset to Input red black level settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLx0 Set a red black level offset for the second A to D EXAMPLE ROO SL10 10 Set a red gain offset to 10 on Slot 1 RQR RGB QUANTIZATION RANGE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Select RGB quantization range 0 full 0 255 1 limited 16 235 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the RGB quantization range for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the RGB quantization range for main video PIIP Set the RGB quantization range for PIP video EXAMPLE RQR 1 Set RGB quantization range to limited Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 57 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE RTE REAL TIME EVENTS CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Real time events allow custom user actions to occur based on a system trigger There are various triggers in the system such as power u
89. 00367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference PIP PICTURE IN PICTURE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control enables or disables Picture in Picture PIP mode or Picture by Picture PBP mode PIP and image transition effects seamless switching both require resources to configure a second image processing path Therefore these two features cannot be active at the same time SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt 0 Disables PIP 1 Enables PIP 2 Enables PBP EXAMPLES PIP 0 Disables PIP video PIP 1 Enables PIP video PIP 2 Enables PBP video picture by picture PIP Returns the state of the PIP control i e PIP 1 PIP enabled PJH PROJECTOR HOURS CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Reports the number of hours elapsed on the projector This control is read only SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE PJH Returns hours elapsed on projector PNG PING CONTROL GROUP Configuration SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Status DESCRIPTION This command returns basic projector information to the user which includes the type of device amp main software version Note that some devices have multiple CPUs each with its own software version Only the software version of what is consid
90. 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix C Serial Command Overview C 1 Introduction This document describes the serial protocol consisting of ASCII text messages used to control an Entero projector remotely C 1 1 Connection and Use C 2 Once you have connected your computer to either the RS 232 IN or RS 422 IN port depending on which standard is supported by your computer or to the ETHERNET port on a projector you can remotely access projector controls and image setups issue commands or queries and receive replies Use these bi directional messages to e Control multiple projectors e Obtain a projector s status report e Diagnose performance problems NOTES 1 Refer to Section 7 Specifications for all cable requirements and other connection details 2 Some commands are operational only when projector is powered up Understanding Message Format Messages can be one of three types e Set A command to set a projector parameter at a specific level such as changing to a certain channel e Request A request for information such as what channel is currently in use Reply The projector returns the data in response to a request or as confirmation of a command All Remote Control information passes IN and OUT of the projector as a simple text message consisting of a three letter command code an optional 4 letter subcode and any related data When a parameter for a specific source is being accessed
91. 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i 3 28 e Gamma Slope This control defines a slope to be used for the base custom gamma table for a small section at the bottom of the curve This slope can be used to bring in or out the low level blacks in the image This slope combined with the gamma function defines the custom gamma table Detail Settings Adjusts the sharpness of the image Setting detail above the halfway point can introduce noise in the image Lower Detail Settings settings can improve a noisy signal Detail Detail 2 Texture Enhancement 0 Adjusts the sharpness of the image Setting detail above the Detail Threshold halfway point can introduce noise in the image Lower Detail Overshoot settings can improve a noisy signal This command does not take effect unless the minimum change required in the Split Screen Detail Threshold control is reached e Texture Enhancement Applies texture detail enhancement based on adaptive horizontal vertical and diagonal large edge and small edge enhancement processes e Detail Threshold Selects a filter sensitivity to noise A higher value may improve noisy sources especially for higher settings of detail e Detail Overshoot Minimizes ringing on the enhanced edges detail and texture effects e Split Screen Allows a snap shot of the main image to be presented on the right side of the screen to allow evaluation of advanced image processing f
92. 102120 01 IEC EMI Blue Filter LAN Blue witch Brown AC T Te Blug Brow OSRAM D P500 B P Ground Stud DD TH T Te e Violet P400 J400 Black Lover LOvd 2 Light Module LM 2 Y x Z gt a O amp a JAER EREE 2 IRSA 121421401481 E 3 3 E J27 J26 J28 J29 J10 J12 0 P27 P26 P28 P29 P10 P12 SSE i 3 D p4 emp p p 0 00 098 88 lo cE Ji o anw o Pi 001 111321 01 Projector Head Module PHM Light Board 001 110913 xx Fan 1 001 111034 xx gt Fana Ea 001 111034 xx y N Air Inlet Eos Osa Senso EE 001 100585 xx Air Exhaust EH gt 001 111093 xx 02 001 100585 BMD Ze Pim 1S 001 100585 xx Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 001 110994 xx 001 111001 xx LM LMC FDWU 001 110918 xx RPMWU LEDO1 001 110916 xx RPMSP LEDO1 Zd Interposer 015 100216 01 WU 39 001250 01P SX Ld Front IR Senso J50 g DB15 001 111038 xx o EM Power IR Keypad cc D 002 100005 xx DB25 Dual GPIO PHM Network RS232 IN 016 103186 xx EM Network Link B 001 111145 xx Link A Filter 016 103176 xx 12 AMPS m 016 102836 xx J26 P26 VGA J10 P10B J10 P10C Electronic Module EM B D 00 00 Image Processor Card
93. 15 copying 3 14 creating 3 12 deleting 3 14 editing 3 15 horizontal and vertical frequency 3 12 including in menus 3 15 list 3 11 Locked 3 15 signal type 3 13 using 3 12 See also channels check boxes menus 3 9 Chroma Luma Delay 3 23 Clamp Location 3 25 Cleaning projection lens 5 3 projector covers 5 3 Clear Adjustments projector color adjustment 3 51 Coarse Adjustment brightness uniformity 3 39 Codes error 6 3 color See also Video Options color drift See clamp location Color Enable 3 46 color management see ArrayLOC Color Space 3 21 Color saturation 3 23 colors changing display 3 6 Common Gamut 3 52 Communications 3 34 to 3 36 components projector 1 4 Configuration menu 3 30 connecting sources 2 2 contrast adaptive 3 23 Contrast Image Settings menu 3 21 Contrast remote keypad 3 4 Cooling considerations 5 1 Copy Adjustments From 3 52 Copy Channel 3 14 Copy Color Space From 3 50 copying channels 3 14 Covers projector cleaning 5 3 creating channels 3 12 crushing See also input peak detector auto input levels 3 24 black levels 3 22 Index 1 Index input levels 3 24 Custom Sizing 3 17 D DANGERS electrical hazards 5 2 5 4 eye damage 5 1 servicing qualifications 5 2 Date amp Time setting 3 32 decoder AGC enabling 3 22 defaul aspect ratio 3 17 Default Gateway 3 35 Delete All Channels 3 14 Delete Channel 3 14 Delete Unlo
94. 20 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE i Section 3 Operation Edge Blending Edge Blending The Edge Blending submenu provides a range of controls for Edge Blending Standard smoothing together the overlapping bright edges of multiple Test Pattern Off adjacent projected images to create a single larger seamless Left Blend Width 0 image These controls which primarily affect white levels are Right Blend Width 0 typically used in conjunction with mechanical lens blinders Top Blend Width optional which are installed on the front of the projector and Bottom Blend Width which primarily affect black levels Brightness uniformity adjustment if desired should be performed first The Edge Blend or Grid test pattern available from the Test Pattern drop down is useful for the mechanical setup of the projectors If necessary adjust Black Level Blending first with the Black test pattern then use the White test pattern to blend the white levels on the blend edges The final step is to check the blended image with an external source There is a centerline both horizontal and vertical in the Edge Blending test pattern The intersection of these lines is the true center of the projector display area Show Blending Overlap Advanced Edge Blending Full Screen Eye Motion Filter _ Eye Motion Filter O 70 Reset Edge Blending Settings The Show Blending Overlap control enables or disables edge ble
95. 29219 pay Jo ped ang pay jo ued U39219 P9y JO Hed Psy goeds 10 09 jobie juau sn py 10 09 10399 01d OTNMTNON Oo TKNOYOTNOOR DD wol4 do Y a1qeuy 10 09 El 9 qeuy 10109 oyny Z A SHUM OL X HUM Aang xang A UBBIDO X Uu9Salo APay X pay soedg JOjOD PLA anjesedua JOIOD Z jueunsn py 10109 pajas AX Aq sjuawjsnipy 40 09 enuelAr NIAMNONOO 19618 sseujybug 9Y ZL aiqeuz wWayjed 3591 91 qeu4 10109 Ny SL ainjesadua 10 09 SHUYM El due JOJO 0 SHUM19S ZL WO SHUM P S LL wol4 aseds Jojo9 do9 OL A ayy peL 56 X 9YyM eL 8 Aang Biel 2 x an g Je 9 A usalo obey x UBdIO yoHe A poy aie x poy joBie ugedeo Aeuy aseds 10 09 JJe L job1e 10 09 Aey B y Z L pPON AREN SINSEIN ZL sBumes 10 09 SNJEN lOJOe 0 asay L L ajokg mg SHUM SAJEN GPPAN OL a Ayn AYM ONEN ajokg mg uang A SHUM PAREN X SHUM PAREN A anja SANEN X 3N 9 SANEN A U39 ANEN X 19219 ANEN A P9Y SAJEN X P9Y SMJEN ainyesadwia 10 09 NOTN ON OD SHUM SAJEN biel lt sBunjjas 10109 SANEN uolesnyes Jojo enuen y AX Aq sjuauujsn py 10109 jenueyy juewysnipy g9y lenueyy Z sBuljes 1009 eAeN L yuawebeuey 1009 Suipua g 96p3 pesueapy Ayunoyup sseuyybug jesay 191114 UOHON 9 3 uono
96. 50 for main video Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 D 71 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE UID USER ID CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL None DESCRIPTION Allows users to login to the serial interface SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES UID username password Login a user UID Logout the current user also happens automatically when a new user logs in UID Display the current logged in user and their access level UID username 01 woe VBL VIDEO BLACK INPUT CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control affects the black level for video signals Most NTSC video standards include an offset to black which is useful for setting up CRT projectors Set this control to 7 5 IRE if the video black level seems excessively elevated Set to 0 IRE if video black levels are crushed This control applies to analog cards with YUV color space only Valid values are 0 0IRE 1 7 5 IRE SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Get the video black level for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the video black level for main video PIIP Set the video black level for PIP video EXAMPLES VBL 1 Set the video black level for main video to 7 5 IRE VBL MAIN 1 Set the video black level for main video to 7 5 IRE VBL IN32 0 Set the video black
97. 6 2012 Appendix B Web UI CHAISTIE B 3 6 Advanced Tabbed Page RTE B 10 The RTE Real Time Events tab is where you can manage real time events i e add delete edit copy and setup the GPIO as described in the following section RTE Buttons The real time event buttons include the following e Add create a new event Delete remove one or multiple existing events Delete All remove all events e Edit change or add information for an existing event Copy clone an existing event e Stop discontinue the event running e GPIO Setup used to configure the GPIO pins as inputs outputs and to set the current state of the output pins To Add a Scheduled Event Scheduled events include a command or sequence of commands for example PWR1 or PWR1 SHU1 1 Click Add to open the RTE Wizard 2 Select the Scheduled Event tab NOTE The scheduled tab is always selected by default on add RTE Wizard Scheduled Event System Event GPIO Event Function Key Event DMX Channel Event f Start Time O Once 2009 09 15 2009 09 15 e Daily Weekly j10 25 52 e Monthly Projector Date and Time 2009 09 15 10 31 49 Description A Command String GPIO Output Helper Help f4 Serial Representation RTE T 2009 09 15 10 25 52 S BEI Figure B 14 Scheduled Event Window 3 Select the frequency option for the event by selecting either Once Daily Weekly or Monthly NOTE End Date is enabled wh
98. 7 To adjust color primary settings repeat for each projector that needs adjusting a Press PROJ lt PROJECTOR ID gt on the remote The remote directs commands to the specified projector Adjust the XXX Part of YYY controls where and YYY is the color being adjusted and XXX and YYY are not the same color ie non dominant colors Negative values for the non dominant colors are permitted Adjusting XXX Part of XXX adjusts the color s brightness and affects the color of white Example If the blue primary color does not match Use the Red Part of Blue and Green Part of Blue controls Negative values will increase the saturation of the blue Values between 15 and 3 work well Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 3 57 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation i C S S SCCC A STE NOTE For information about using a color meter with this procedure see Fine tune Projector Colors With a Color Meter on page 3 58 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all the primary colors are matched 9 After adjusting the primary colors verify that the white color and brightness still match Repeat the process if necessary Fine tune Projector Colors With a Color Meter To use a color meter for projector color adjustments follow the instructions in Fine Tune Whites White Brightness or Primary Colors on page 3 57 but use a color meter for the XXX Part of YYY adjustments 1 To note the xy color values r
99. 9 y98 g lt qd gt an1g AUQ Indu lt 4 gt U3219 9A9p198 8 lt A gt UBdIO 3ALG Indu lt Id gt P Y 9A9P198 9 lt d gt P9yY 1937 ndu oy s a 7 ndu liepuodas TNA MIL oONno Oo abuey uonezjueno gow ZI yseyjuog eandepy OL Aejaq eun7 euolyo 6 ypaJ8Q PON Wl 8 apo Buijdwes Z J19Y14 9 WIL G 40 09 y yeg Capi indu e PIEPUR S OSpIA Z DOV Jeposeq a1qeuy suoijdo oapi lepuosdas sbeu peoueapy lepuodas sjena yndu lepuosas 9 a suondo o pIA lepuosas G asedg 10 09 y sseujyBng Z s6unjas abew 1epuodas sbumes sexuog 5uyyuejg lepuosas dnjas oyny uo padsy das y UOH ISOY A HISOd H seyd 9XId YORI L 9XId Y9 J91IS BIS 8ZIS S S Jd SZISOY uon Sod Y 9ZIS Aepuos s TKNOYMOTNO OR DD JO OD J9PIOY did UIPIM 19PIOG did UOHISOH A did UOHISOd H did 3ZIS MOPUIM did CASIO suoydo Mopulm did yBnoiy doo7 aajoy Aqpuejs Z asnos doo yndino WGH LL Buiyoueas ndul omy OL Bupjoo7 ewes au Spey sSumes s6eu lepuodas Od 9 3ZIS lepuodas suondO MOPuIM did 9 qeu3 did sebeul did pue uey dems indu lepuodas induj ue Buiyoyims ndu lepuodas TKNOMTNOOR DD p3 jeuueyg sjeuueyo Ily
100. ABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Automatically select Color Enable based on the control being adjusted If enabled this control allows the projector to automatically change the color enable control when the user is using the OSD interface to adjust controls such as Input levels odd pixel and brightness uniformity This is an unsaved control which can only be set when powered on and only affects the operation of the On Screen menus SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable Disable auto color controls EXAMPLES ACE 0 Disable Auto Color ACE 1 Enable Auto Color ACO ADAPTIVE CONTRAST CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adaptive Contrast Enhancement dynamically expands the contrast of the output image producing vibrant images with seamless response to scene changes and fades The adaptive contrast function implements a dynamic non linear mapping between the Input and output contrast levels based on frame by frame luminance histogram measurement of the Input image SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the adaptive contrast for SlotSlot x Input y Range 0 15 MAIN Set the adaptive contrast for main video Range 0 15 PIIP Set the adaptive contrast for PIP video Range 0 15 EXAMPLES ACO 8 Sets adaptive contrast for main image to 50 strength Entero RPMWU RPMSP R
101. AMPLES KEY 46 Send the Power key Down press KEY 174 Send the Power key Up release KEY View the last emulated key that was sent LBL LEFT BLANKING CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the number of lines to blank turn to black at the left of the image This can be used to blank out any unwanted data near the left edge of the image A positive amount of blanking makes the image smaller A negative amount of blanking makes the image larger Negative blanking is only applicable to analog signals when the auto setup has not been able to set the image size correctly It is preferable not to use negative blanking but to run auto setup again ensuring that the content has active pixels on each edge of the image The maximum amount of left blanking allowed is half the image width minus 10 For negative blanking the image size can only be increased to the limit of the sync D 38 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference LBL LEFT BLANKING Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the left blanking for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the left blanking for the Main image PIIP Set the left blanking for the PIP image EXAMPLES LBL 40 Set left blanking to 40 on Main video LBL MAIN 40 Set left blanking to 40 on main video LBL PIIP 40 Set left bl
102. Aiyjawioag TKNOTNONM DO VB El sBummes peo undo LL So nes OL uo e1queo 9 sopsouBelg JOJO AyaWoay SUO EOIUNWLUOD sa3ueJajaJd NU W aul 8 3q juowabeuey Jamog TOON OD suondo yndjno ebenBue7 uoyeInbyuog N t t obed ess nuem e9 Mes WOJ pejoajes juawabeueyy 10 09 UlSHed 1891 6 enbue g Bulyoyms 3 yndu 1epuodas 7 snjeys 9 uo eInByuoy y dnjas euueyo e s6umes sbeu z UO ISO Y PUB 3ZIS nua UICN 45 Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHRISTIE Menu Tree Section 4 4 1 3 MENU TREE CONTINUED ARRAYLOC sseujybug gay azluoJyou s ejeg auweJ4 Aeuy wnuiuip 9 Aejaq wesy Aey 18S G Aejaq awei4 azluoJyou s y 3 q8u3 Jojo5 UJSped 3sa shay ZIUOIYJU e OMEN DOT BLY uoneinByu0y 9074euy Juauysnipy 410 09 10 99 014 G job1e 10 09 Aeuy p 40 G p 25ed 29S s6unyes pled uondo LL AM S OL UONe1qUeo 9 sonsoubelg 6 10 09 9 AuJaWoay g SUONBIIUNWIWIOD Z sagualajalg NUBW 9 aul 9 9A G juawabeueyy JaMOd t suoydo mamo Z benbue7 Of p p 9Bey 99s Auiqedeo 10 98 01q weg WINWIUIW Z sseujyBug wnuwtuly uoyembyuog JOHO ug ss u yfug 9H LL obre ssoujybuig g9 OL uopelnByuo9 DO T BLIY Jays SMe s QO Tey snes DOT RLI juau sn py 10109 JOJ99 O0IY
103. CS ESA PRET TP Use this menu to adjust settings affecting current image size and position such as horizontal and vertical placement blanking resizing and others Gi Status Secondary Input amp Switching Language English X Test Pattern lt 3 2 3 The Global Icon Menu options that include this icon apply universally Menu options without this icon apply to the selected channel only 3 2 4 Using Slide bars and Other Controls 3 8 Most of the function menus allow you to change settings by using slide bars check boxes and drop down lists Navigating options Enter the menu option number corresponding to the setting you wish to change for example press MENU 1 3 to select Vertical Stretch in the Size and Position menu e Move the highlight to the option desired and press ENTER e Move the highlight to the option desired and press LEFT RIGHT arrow key to adjust immediately Both the number and the length of the bar change accordingly See Figure 3 2 Hold for continuous adjustment e You can bypass the menus entirely and use a single key to immediately access an adjustment during your presentation applies only to options having their own key such as CONTRAST BRIGHT GAMMA etc e For blind access hide the entire menu system see OSD On screen display on page 3 5 and access using the proper sequence of key presses Slide bars in menus The current value for a given parameter such as s
104. Communications menu Enter Press ENTER to select a highlighted item to toggle a check box or to accept a parameter adjustment and return to the previous menu or image Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation 3 2 3 2 1 Exit Press EXIT to return to the previous level the previous menu NOTE EXIT does not save changes within text editing boxes including number editing of a slide bar value or within drop down lists It acts as a cancel in these cases Arrow Keys Use the LEFT RIGHT arrow key to change a slide bar value or to select a different option within a drop down list without having to first scroll through options or navigate within a menu drop down list or text box Laser Press and hold LASER to activate the laser pointer on the remote Point CAUTION the remote at the screen to highlight an area of your presentation The EASER RADIATION LASER pointer requires batteries in the wired remote in order to work xk DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM LASER DIODE Wavelength 670nm Navigating the Menus Max Output 1mW CLASS II LASER PRODUCT Main Menu Most of the projector controls are accessed from within the projector a menu system There are several groups of related functions with each Size amp Position group selectable from the Main Menu Press MENU at any time to display Image Settings this Main Menu eT Configuration On the remote key
105. Connecting Sources on page 2 2 For more information on the keys available on the remote and their function see 3 1 Using the IR Remote on page 3 1 Disconnecting the Projector from AC MN ANNE Do not turn the main Power switch to the OFF position or disconnect the projector until the cooling fans have stopped If you need to check the power connections an interconnection label is available for reference on the light module 1 Stop the projector 2 After the internal cooling fans stop move the main power switch on the Light Module to the OFF position This gives the Light Module enough time to cool down 3 Disconnect the line cord from the wall outlet Refer to Section 7 Specifications for complete details on all power requirements for the projector Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 2 1 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 2 Setting Up a Source CH IS TIE 2 1 3 Re connecting the projector to AC 2 2 2 2 If you need to check the power connections an interconnection label is available for reference on the light module Connect a correctly rated line cord to the AC receptacle located on the electronics module and use the 3 pronged end into a grounded AC outlet The input voltage to the projector must be capable of 100 240 VAC NOTE Do not use a line cord or AC supply not in the specified voltage and power range Refer to Section 7 Specifications for projector power requirements 1 Connect an approved l
106. December 25 2008 RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 S description CHA 2 switch to channel 2 on January 1 2009 at 23 00 00 Daily Occurring Event RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 02 01 D 1 description PWR 1 power on the projector every day at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until February 1 2009 RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 02 01 D 2 description PWR 1 power on the projector every other day at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until February 1 2009 RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 02 01 D 5 description PWR 1 power on the projector every fifth day at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until February 1 2009 Weekly Occurring Event RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 03 01 W 1 SSu description PWR 0 power off the projector every week on Saturday and Sunday at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until March 1 2009 inclusive RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 03 01 W 2 MTWThE description PWR 1 power on the projector every other week on every weekday at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until March 1 2009 inclusive RTE T 2009 01 01 23 00 00 2009 03 01 W 5 MTWThE description PWR 1 power on the projector every fifth week on every weekday at 23 00 00 starting from January 1 2009 until March 1 2009 inclusive Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 59 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE RTE REAL
107. Disable Auto Channel Select for channel 1 D 8 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHK IS TIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference ASU AUTO SETUP CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control tells the projector to automatically adjust as many parameters as it can to produce the optimal setup for the current input NOTE If main and PIP video are using the same channel the Auto Setup will act on both regardless of the sub code being used In some cases for analog video the user can select the format that best suits their source This selection helps the Auto Setup get the correct settings for the tracking and phase controls for analog sources that contain the same number of active lines but have a different aspect ratios e All digital and decoder option cards do not allow options for auto setup since digital hardware provides enough information to perform the correct auto setup e Analog PC graphics sources 4 5 wire sync present a list of formats based on the current active lines detected in the video e Analog Video Sources 3 wire sync on green always have the options Default and Advanced Video sources use a look up table to determine their format based on video standards The Advanced Auto Setup selection measures the start pixel and start line whereas Default uses the table values as is
108. E DESCRIPTION OF USE PRTA Set the protocol on port A RS 232 In pass through PRTB Set the protocol on port B RS 232 Out PRTC Set the protocol on port C RS 422 EXAMPLES PTL PRTA 0 Set protocol on port A to a Christie Digital serial protocol PTL PRTA 1 Set protocol on port A to a pass through raw data protocol PTL PRTA Get protocol PTL PRTA 000 Christie Protocol PVP PIP VERTICAL POSITION CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Sets the vertical position of the PIP window Specifies where to place the center of the PIP window vertically on the panel in pixels SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES PVP 100 Set PIP vertical position to 100 pixels PVP Get PIP vertical position PVP 100 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 51 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE PWR POWER CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Change the power state of the projector Valid values are 0 Power OFF 1 Power ON 10 Cooldown lamp is cooling down controlled by lamp Read only 11 Warmup lamp is warming up controlled by lamp Read only SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Get or Set the power state of the projector EXAMPLES PWR Get projector power status PWR1 Turn the lamp
109. ESCRIPTION Temporarily enable or disable the IR and wired keypad Inputs to a specific projector in a network of projectors When a projector is disabled the only key that works is PROJ The next time the projector is powered up again it will revert to fully enabled The built in keypad will always be fully functional This control does not overwrite the Front IR Back IR and Wired Keypad settings SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set 0 to temporarily disable keypad access to this projector EXAMPLES APJ 1 Projector is active keypads are enabled APJ 0 Projector is not active keypads are temporarily disabled APJ Is the projector keypad active or not D 6 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference APW AUTO POWER UP CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION When the A C switch is turned ON the projector will automatically change from Stand by Mode to Power ON Mode The projector will switch the lamp s on without waiting for further user actions SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set to 1 to enable EXAMPLES APW 0 Projector will remain in Standby Mode until the user presses the power key APW 1 Projector will auto power up when A C power is switched on ARO ASPECT RATIO OVERLAY CONTROL GROUP Unsaved
110. Entero R MWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 USER MANUAL 020 100367 05 CHAISTIE Entero R MWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 USER MANUAL 020 100367 05 NOTICES COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS O 2011 2012 Christie Digital Systems USA Inc All rights reserved All brand names and product names are trademarks registered trademarks or trade names of their respective holders REGULATORY The product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the product is operated in a commercial environment The product generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of the product in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user s own expense This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada 0 IIE AFEA FT 22 AARARESL 217120 MAA EE ABA JAL 9317 BAO AA 919 4991 ABSHE AS S402 Myr GENERAL Every effort has been made to ensure accuracy however in some cases changes in the products or availability could occur which may not be reflected in this document Christie reserv
111. F the current drive and blacklevel values are maintained This control only applies to analog BNC or Dual DVI cards Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 5 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE AIL AUTO INPUT LEVEL Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAIN Perform auto Input level on the main image PIIP Perform auto Input level on the PIP image EXAMPLES AIL 1 Perform auto Input level on the main image AIL PIIP 1 Perform auto Input level on the PIP image ALT ACTIVE LOOP THROUGH CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION In situations where a Twin HDMI Input card is being used to loop signals out to another projector this feature ensures that video signals continue to be looped out when the projector enters Standby power mode Note that when the projector is in Standby mode and this feature is enabled limited channel control is available inputs can be switched can perform Auto Setup and some limited input settings can be modified SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable or disable active loop through EXAMPLES ALT 1 Enable Standby active loop through ALT 0 Disable Standby active loop through ALT Get the current Standby active loop through setting APJ ACTIVE PROJECTOR CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator D
112. ION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES EME Get current Error Message Enable state EME 1 Direct error messages to the screen ESM EM STEALTH MODE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Stealth mode extinguishes LEDs on the Electronics Module Typically this is used in simulation environments where extraneous light would detract from the scenario when the scene involves IR SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES ESM 1 Enable EM stealth mode ESM Report the stealth mode value FAD FADE TIME CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Controls the amount of time it takes to fade between images on a source switch It also fades in the PIP and OSD if possible SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Time in hundredths of a second to allow the fade Range 0 150 where 150 1 5 seconds 1 10ms 0 off EXAMPLE FAD 100 Fade for 1 second D 26 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference FAS FAN ASSIST SWITCH CONTROL GROUP Saved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the ability for all fans to operate at maximum speed during a thermal over temp condition SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode
113. L Returns all queued problems and their solutions HLT LALL 3 Returns problem index 3 and its solution HOR HORIZONTAL POSITION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Move the horizontal position of the image left or right SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAIN Set the horizontal position for the main image EXAMPLES HOR 500 Set horizontal position to 500 on main video HOR MAIN 500 Set horizontal position to 500 on main video HOR IN32 500 Set horizontal position to 500 on Slot 3 Input 2 HOR Returns the horizontal position value on main video Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 35 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE INM CHANNEL IN MENU CONTROL GROUP Channel SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Determine whether the channel should be visible in the Channel List which is available by pressing the Channel key on the remote s keypad SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE COxx Toggle In Menu for channel xx channel number from 01 to 99 MAIN Toggle In Menu for the channel being used by main PUP Toggle In Menu for the channel being used by PIP EXAMPLES INM Get channel in menu state for channel used by main INM MAIN Get channel in menu state for channel used by main INM PIIP Get channel in menu state for channel used
114. OF USE SLCT Selects the white point 0 3200K 4 9300K D93 1 5000K D50 5 User 1 2 6500K D65 6 User 2 3 7500K D75 7 User 3 8 User 4 WHxX Adjusts the x coordinate of the white color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places WHxY Adjusts the y coordinate of the white color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places WHxT Sets user set color temperature and adjusts the white point x and y coordinates Available for user settings if SWxT is set to 1 SWxT Selects whether user presets are generated from white point values 0 or from a color temperature value 1 COPY Copy white point settings from preset to current Value 0 8 for source preset EXAMPLES TWP WH6X 290 Set User 2 target white x point to 0 290 TWP WH2Y Return value of 6500K setting white y point TWP SWCT 1 Derive x and y from color temperature setting TWP WHCT 8000 Set color temperature to 8000K TWP COPY 4 Copy settings from 9300K to current TXE TEXTURE ENHANCEMENT DESCRIPTION enhancement processes CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator Applies texture detail enhancement based on adaptive horizontal vertical and diagonal large edge and small edge SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the texture enhancement for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the texture enhancement for main video PIIP Set the texture enhancement for PIP video EXAMPLE TXE 50 Set the texture enhancement to
115. ORE90 NUS Z NI zez su ajey pneg SUL zZ yuo4 nuaw e625 suondo NI Z z su enas tt syed Ss39U93 9J9 1 NU W w 8A q JSISSY UB y 6 apo yeas WA 8 uw sayy qpuejs J9 uy Z uw sayy e6eu yo un 9 alqeuz UMopinys ny G dN samo Omy y juauaBe ue 1 MOod 90JNOS doo7 ndmo IWGH 6 ouenbal4 uny 9914 Z Aejaq ewe enjoy 9 Aejaq ewes 39S G Bulyjoo7 auely y u0 ejuaLig eeuu Uaalos suoijdo nd no DOT BuY El sBumes pied uondo LL aS OL UONeIqueo 9 sonsouBerg 10109 wo 9 SuOpeoJunuuoo saguaJejeJd NUS au 9 2A juawaBeuey Jomo suondo indino ebenBue uoneinByuog TNOON OD N UJSPEd 1891 6 ebenbue7 8g Bulyoyms 3 mdu lepuosas 7 snes 9 UOpeInByuoy y dnjes auueyo e sBunjas obew z UOHISOd PUE ZIS nuay UICN Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 4 4 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Menu Tree Section 4 CHXISTIE 4 1 2 MENU TREE CONTINUED GEOMETRY AND COLOR sSumes pasuerpy Jasay OL qulodpiw pus g woyog adeys pu jg woyog quiodpiyy puejg do adeys puajg do quiodpiyy puajg 1yBry edeys puajg f y quiodplW puajg 497 adeys pusig ya7 ng pasuerpy ajqeuy TKNOYMOTNOOR DD giqeuz 10109 ony EL wol4 sumas do9 Zz Jojo enig JOJO0 USD 10 09 Py sseujyBbug Q LL anid JO Hed 43819 WT OL anid JO Hed ped W1 6
116. OWER followed immediately by the UP arrow key ON or DOWN arrow key OFF to guarantee that the correct action is initiated This is useful if you are unsure of the present state of the projector Test Steps forward through all internal test patterns After stepping past the last test pattern you will return to current input Press TEST and then cycle by using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow keys to cycle in either direction through the test patterns Press EXIT to return to the current input Auto Initiates an automated process in which the projector optimizes critical display parameters such as size position pixel tracking etc for the current source These parameters are listed in Table 3 1 An auto setup can save time in perfecting a display and you can modify the adjustments as desired Table 3 1 Auto Setup OPTIMIZES SETS TO DEFAULT Pixel Tracking Contrast Pixel Phase Brightness Size and Blanking Auto Input Level OFF Vertical Stretch Detail if video source Position Filter Input Levels Luma Delay Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 3 3 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 3 4 NOTE You must have an unlocked channel present to use Auto Setup The best Auto Setup will be obtained under the following conditions e Input levels It is best to have an image with saturated very bright colors e Phase High contrast edges are needed To determine Active Window size e Video images should have
117. P video to the specified value in the range of known video standards EXAMPLES STD 0 Set video standard to 0 PAL on main video STD MAIN 1 Set video standard to 1 NTSC_M on main video STD PIIP 0 Set video standard to 0 PAL on PIP video STD IN32 3 Set video standard to 3I NTSC_4 43 on Slot 3 Input 2 STD Returns the current video standard on main video STD PIIP Returns the current video standard value on PIP video STD IN12 Returns the current video standard value on Slot 1 Input 2 SZP SIZE PRESETS CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Sets the image to one of several preset size position presets 0 Default 3 Full Width 5 Anamorphic 1 None 4 Full Height 6 Custom 2 Full Screen SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES SZP 1 Set the size preset to no resizing TBL TOP BLANKING CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the number of lines to blank turn to black at the top of the image This can be used to blank out any unwanted data near the top edge of the image A positive amount of blanking makes the image smaller A negative amount of blanking makes the image larger Negative blanking is only applicable to analog signals when the auto setup has not been able to set the image size correctly It is preferable not to use
118. PIO Event Function Key Event DMX Channel Event Boot up Power L Error cco Signal Description See ee E Channel Change System Event Command String GPIO Output Helper Help z Serial Representation RTE S 00 00 Figure B 19 Add System Event NOTE Depending on the selection made additional selections are made available in the second drop down list located underneath i e Input Change gt Input 1 Slot 1 To Add a GPIO Event 1 Click Add to open the RTE Wizard 2 Select the GPIO Event tab 3 Forthe GPIO Event option define the Input Condition field as required The Input Condition field contains 7 blocks which refer to the 7 I O pins on the GPIO connector Pin 1 12V and Pin 5 Ground are not included or changed 2 Clicking a block toggles between H L and X as shown in Figure B 20 See Appendix D Serial Command Reference for detailed information To Add a Function Key Event 1 Click Add to open the RTE Wizard 2 Select the Function Key Event tab 3 Select a Func function key from the drop down list as shown in Figure B 21 Refer to Section 3 Operation for detailed information RTE Wizard Scheduled Event System Event GPIO Event Function Key Event DMX Channel Event GPIO Event Input Condition LIAIX LXIL px 1 GPIO GPIO 7 J GPIO Output Helper Hep En E A Figure B 20 GPIO Event Description Command String Serial Represen
119. PMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 3 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE ACT ACTIVE WINDOW CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control defines the Input active window in pixels The production aperture is available for analog sources only but not for decoded analog signals The aperture is set once on every auto setup or on new signal detection when a channel for that signal is not present The aperture defines the maximum window in which blanking controls can be opened up to relative to the active portion of the signal This is a read only control SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the adaptive contrast for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the adaptive contrast for main video PIIP Set the adaptive contrast for PIP video EXAMPLES ACT Returns the active window for main video ACT PHP Returns the active window for PIP video ACT IN12 Returns the active window for Slot 1 Input 2 ADR ADDRESS CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set Query Device Address on ASCII Protocol network Required only for RS 232 connections that are daisy chained to allow directed messages SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Valid Address range is 0 to 999 Reserved broadcast address is 65535 EXAMPLES 65535 ADR 0 Set all devices to address 0 0 ADR
120. Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Freeze the display image This allows a detailed examination of a single frame of an otherwise moving image Switching channels Inputs automatically switches the projector to unfrozen Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 29 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE FRZ FREEZE IMAGE Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAIN Freeze or un freeze the main image 1 freeze 0 unfreeze PIIP Freeze or un freeze the PIP image 1 freeze 0 unfreeze EXAMPLE FRZ MAIN 1 Freeze the main image GAM GAMMA CORRECTION CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The Gamma Correction control is used to correct ambient conditions affecting the display The Gamma control affects the shape of the curve determining what grey shades are displayed for a given amount of signal Input between minimum black and maximum white This is done by performing a linear transform from the user selected gamma channel setting The normal point is 0 meaning the selected gamma table is used unaltered If there is a lot of ambient light the image can become washed out making it difficult or impossible to see details in dark areas Increasing the gamma correction setting can compensate for this by transforming the curve towards a gamma of 1 0 Decreasing the control shall transform the gamma towards a gamma
121. Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Edge Blending Procedure NOTES 1 Before attempting to work with edge blending software functions align the projectors images by correctly overlapping the displays from your intended external source 2 Match colors and the brightness uniformity IMPORTANT For a shared edge all blend procedures and settings should be identical on both projectors 1 2 3 4 8 9 Start with 2 projectors Display full white field test pattern from both In the Edge Blending submenu enable Edge Blending by choosing Standard from the drop down Check the Show Blending Overlap box on both projectors Set starting points for adjustment a Set all blend widths to 0 b Go to Advanced Edge Blending and set all options to 50 Set blend width a On one projector increase the Blend Width for an overlapping edge for example if the projector image is on the left its right edge overlaps the adjacent image adjust Right Blend Width b Use the same setting on the second projector for this shared edge NOTE Recommended overlap is 12 5 25 In applications where you are projecting only white or light images the Blend Width may be slightly higher set according to how much overlap you have between images Increase blend width both projectors until the overly bright band at the midpoint of the overlapping blends is at 50 grey level For the shared edge use the same Blend Width setting on e
122. Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference RDB RED BLACK LEVEL Cont d MAIN Set the red black level on the main video to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PIIP Set the red black level on the PIP video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 EXAMPLES RDB 128 Set red black level to 128 on main video RDB MAIN 128 Set red black level to 128 on main video RDB PIIP 100 Set red black level to 100 on PIP video RDB IN32 100 Set red black level to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 RDB Returns the current red black level value on main video RDB PIIP Returns the current red black level value on PIP video RDB IN12 Returns the current red black level value on Slot 1 Input 2 RDD RED DRIVE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The red drive level is used to compensate for different amounts of attenuation between the Red Green and Blue in the signal Available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting achieves maximum contrast without crushing white or black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made for each sourc
123. SH 0 Turn OFF Auto Shutdown Mode ASH SBTO 10 Set standby time out to 10 minutes ASH ALTO 10 Set source activity loss time out to 10 minutes ASR AUTO CHANNEL SELECT CONTROL GROUP Channel SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The Auto Channel Select ASR option allows the projector to select the channel memory best suited to the Input signal If the current channel does not allow Auto Channel Select the projector will not attempt to select a new channel when the signal changes If the current channel does allow Auto Channel Select then upon signal detection an existing channel will be chosen If a match is not found a new channel will be created SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE COxx Enable disable Auto Channel Select on channel xx channel number from 01 to 99 MAIN Enable disable Auto Channel Select on the channel being used by main PIIP Enable disable Auto Channel Select on the channel being used by PIP EXAMPLES ASR Get Auto Channel Select state for channel being used by main ASR MAIN Get Auto Channel Select state for channel being used by main ASR PIIP Get Auto Channel Select state for channel being used by PIP ASR 1 Enable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by main ASR PIIP 1 Enable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by PIP ASR MAIN 0 Disable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by main ASR C001 0
124. StIM SIM SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLxy Set the EDID timings on Slot x to the specified type EXAMPLES DED SL31 1 Set EDID type to 2 Custom on Slot 3 Input 1 DED SL12 Returns the current EDID type on Slot 1 Input 2 DLG DATA LOGGING CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set data logging level 0 Minimal logging of activities Logging system errors warnings and events 1 e power ON OFF lamp ON OFF user login logout 1 Normal logging Most activities logged errors warnings events and other info 2 Debug logging All activities are logged SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt There are 3 levels for data logging EXAMPLES DLG1 Set current logging level to 1 DLG Get current logging level Response is DLG 001 D 22 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference DTL DETAIL CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control adjusts the sharpness of the image The sharpness detail enhancement applied is based on adaptive horizontal vertical and diagonal large edge and small edge enhancement processes Setting detail above the halfway point can introduce noise in the image lower settings can improve a noisy signal This command does not take effect unless the minimum change re
125. Status and error information is available through e LEDs on the input panel of the projector See 6 2 1 LED Status Display on the Projector Status page in the menu system access Main menu gt Status e Status page on the web UI access Main tab gt Status page and click on any category with a yellow or red indicator For more information see Appendix B Web User Interface On screen error messages access Main gt Configuration gt Menu Preferences gt Display Error Messages All NOTE Display Error Messages must be set to Screen or All for System messages to appear on screen The status pages in the OSD menu system and the web UI update automatically when the error condition is corrected The error code displayed on the status panel on the projector must be cleared manually with from presentation level no OSD on screen If an error code recurs try resetting the projector by turning the projector OFF and ON A persistent error code may indicate that you need a Christie accredited service technician Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 6 1 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE Section 6 Troubleshooting System Warnings Shows that a system malfunction exists A system warning message replaces the input signal message and disappears when the input signal status changes The projector will remain operational but the message show a possibly serious problem that must be reported to the manufacturer
126. TROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Pixel Tracking adjusts the position of the pixel sampling clock to match the Input signal It can only be set on Analog Input cards If adjusted incorrectly flickering or vertical bars of noise appear across the image Adjust Pixel Tracking so that the noise either disappears or fills the image If it fills the image use Pixel Phase to eliminate the noise The range is 600 4095 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the pixel tracking for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the pixel tracking for the main image PIIP Set the pixel tracking for the PIP image EXAMPLES PXT 600 Set pixel tracking to 600 on main video PXT MAIN 600 Set pixel tracking to 600 on main video PXT PIIP 600 Set pixel tracking to 600 on PIP video PXT IN32 600 Set pixel tracking to 600 on Slot 3 Input 2 PXT Returns the pixel tracking value on main video PXT PIIP Returns the pixel tracking value on PIP video PXT IN 12 Returns the pixel tracking value on Slot 1 Input 2 RAL REMOTE ACCESS LEVEL CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Admin DESCRIPTION Set the remote serial protocol access level for a serial communications port NOTE Valid selections are O No Access 1 Login Required 2 Free Access Default value is 1 Login required SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the access
127. Tighten the yellow lens lock know before fastening the security screws 4 Fasten the security screws Figure 5 1 NOTICE Security screws MUST be installed Remove the front lens cap Security Screws Lens Lock Knob Lens Removed Figure 5 1 Lens Mount Entero R PMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 5 5 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHRISTIE 6 1 6 2 Troubleshooting If the projector is not operating properly record the symptoms and use this section as a guide If a solution to the problem cannot be found contact your dealer for assistance NOTE A Christie accredited service technician is required when opening an enclosure to diagnose any probable cause Troubleshooting Guidelines Read understand and observe all warnings and precautions when diagnosing and servicing the projector e Ensure that the projector is plugged in e Ensure that cables are connected and not damaged Power OFF the projector wait 90 seconds to allow for cooling and Power ON the projector Check for a normal power up sequence Check the projector status for error conditions and correct any issues if possible See 6 2 System Warnings Errors on page 6 1 Check source reliability Switch sources if possible Use RS 232 serial communications to communicate with the projector during diagnosis System Warnings Errors When the projector finds a system malfunction it displays a System Warning or a System Error message
128. UBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Channel Name is optional text assigned to a channel and can appear in the Channel Setup menu Channel Edit menu the channel list and the Status menu SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE COxx Set the channel name for the channel xx channel number from 01 to 99 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 43 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE NAM CHANNEL NAME Cont d MAIN Set the channel name for the channel being used by main PIIP Set the channel name for the channel being used by PIP EXAMPLES NAM Get current active channel name for main video AM MAIN Get channel name being used by main AM PIIP Get channel name being used by PIP AM Test Set channel name being used by main to Test AM PIIP Test Set channel name being used by PIP to Test AM AM MAIN Test Set channel name being used by main to Test C001 Test Set channel name for channel 1 to Test 2222222 NET NETWORK SETUP CONTROL GROUP Config Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Admin DESCRIPTION Set or request the network setup for this device SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE DOMA Set the domain name ETHO Set the IP address for the first ethernet controller GATE Set the network gateway HOST Set the host name MACO Gets the MAC ad
129. User Name and Password eri B 9 Change P ss Word iaa B 9 DI Cte US aiii E EE N E B 9 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual y 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 B 3 6 Advanced Tabbed Page RTE sc sccvesssacsanasscsasetenadsnnsacncesucesecennnsecessenssassnensseenvneanadassensredvnneds B 10 IRE Buttons scan tail E A B 10 B 3 7 To Add a Serial Command o cc cece cece eee ceecececccccccccccccccccccececcececcceccececseccscecsescececeescececseececese B 13 C Serial Command Overview PA ir 0 010 A A e ETE C 1 Cal Connection and Us C 1 C 2 Understanding Message RODA unos sia C 1 21 Basic Message SUCIOS ii C 2 Start and End Ol MeEss ge na C 2 Prefix Characters Optional acia C 2 Projector Numbers Optional od C 2 Ie noo A nee E eee eee eee C 2 U AG OAS croesi a E a eho a a E a a a a a aaa aa aasa Esan C 2 R gu st Reply Symbols snm C 3 Other Special Functions Optional ri C 3 e o o OOO E C 3 Text Parameters ide C 4 C 2 2 Sample Messages and their Meaning gc ciccxsseosdecdsastpaxevenndacestahaateaseatanssnelacxoemeaiedemeasiaaias C 4 C 2 3 What is Actually Sent in a Message ras C 5 C 2 4 Maximizing Message Tte cisoisecisscivierdetencnsesasccadesonsvatane nanunsiaaertssebseaceiaraleseninnessaunds C 5 C 2 5 Accessing Specific Channels or Inputs ssl C 6 C20 Flow OF 210181 0 Cen ne ena en ene ee nn Tae Ere ne ee Ei EEEE EE eee eee C 6 C 2 7 N twork pri C 6 C 3 Description Of Control Types siccacsnsncecascecseascesanrcisoneasea
130. a available in the projector then stretch vertically to fill the screen from top to bottom Add the anamorphic lens to regain image width 2 Check blend settings and masking 6 5 8 Display Quality Appears to Drift from Good to Bad Bad to Good 1 The source input signal may be of low quality 2 The H or V frequency of the input may have changed at the source end 6 5 9 Display Has Suddenly Frozen If the screen blacks out inexplicably it is possible that excessive voltage noise on the AC or ground input has interrupted the projector s ability to lock on to a signal Power the projector down and up again 6 5 10 Colors in the Display Are Inaccurate The color tint color space and or color temperature settings may require adjustment at your input source or on the web user interface Channel gt Page2 menu Make Sure the correct PCF TCGD and or Color Space file for the source is used 6 5 11 Display Is Not Rectangular 1 Check leveling of the projector Make sure the lens surface and screen are parallel to one another 2 Is the vertical offset correct Make the necessary adjustments to the vertical offset on the lens mount 3 Check geometry corrections settings for example keystone adjustment 6 6 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHK ISTIE Section 6 Troubleshooting 6 5 12 Display Is Noisy 1 Display adjustment at the input source may be required Adjust pixel tracking ph
131. a specific standard value Adjusts the colors red green blue and white e User Select 1 of 4 user defined sets of color adjustments defined in the Configuration menu Color Temperature Allows you to specify a color temperature between 3200 K and 9300 K based on the setting of the color temperature slidebar Expressed in degrees Kelvin 3200 K 5400 K etc Lower numbers appear reddish white and higher numbers appear bluish Standard settings are e 9300 K is close to the white of many computer monitors e 6500 K is the standard for color video in both standard and high definition forms e 5400 K is a standard for graphics and black and white video e 3200 K is useful if the projected image is to be filmed or shot as part of a studio set illuminated with incan descent lights For all color temperatures the color primaries red green and blue are unchanged and reflect the native colors of the projector Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 29 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i 3 4 4 Configuration Adjusting System Parameters and Advanced Controls Use the Configuration menu to define general E operating parameters and communications with other Configuration projectors and equipment and to access other advanced Language English processing and image adjustments affecting overall performance The Configuration menu provides Output Options access to diagnostics cal
132. acement schedule 5 3 features 1 4 Film Mode Detect 3 23 Filter 3 23 Flags array 3 52 for source 3 27 Frame Locking 3 61 Free Run Frequency 3 31 Freeze Image 3 46 3 47 3 59 3 60 3 61 Freeze Image During Auto Setup 3 46 Front IR Enabled 3 36 front projection image orientation 3 30 Full Screen Eye Motion Filter 3 40 Func Function key 3 6 changing display color 3 6 editing text 3 6 Func Function key remote keypad 3 6 G Gamma 3 27 gamma adjusting 3 5 Gamma Correction for ambient light 3 27 Gamma key remote keypad 3 5 Gamma Settings menu 3 26 Geometry and Color 3 36 Geometry Correction 3 36 global icon 3 8 Grey Level 3 45 Grid test pattern 3 41 Group bright color array 3 53 Gx projector green CIE 1931 x capability 3 53 GY projector green CIE 1931 Y capability 3 53 CHAISTIE Gy projector green CIE 1931 y capability 3 53 H HDMI Output Loop Source 3 31 3 62 Help key remote keypad 3 5 Help menu 3 8 horizontal frequency channel 3 12 Horizontal keystone adjusting 3 37 horizontal position See H Position Horizontal Shift Menu Preferences 3 32 horizontal streaks See clamp location Host Name 3 36 H Position 3 19 hue tint 3 23 I Image adjustment 3 62 Image Settings menu 3 21 Image Size 3 18 images See also adjusting images custom sizing 3 17 default aspect ratio 3 17 preset sizes 3 17 to 3 18 size and position 3 17 Immunity specifications 7 2
133. ach projector NOTE f the best blend appears to be between two settings choose the wider setting for both projectors Check the blend and adjust as required e To lighten the overall blend increase the Blend Midpoint in both projectors e To darken the overall blend decrease the Blend Midpoint in both projectors To fine tune the amount of mid grey intensity as opposed to black white in the blend adjust Blend Shape in both projectors Repeat with remaining projectors overlaps Check completed display wall with the desired external signal 10 If necessary adjust the mechanical alignment to maintain perfect pixel on pixel alignment over time Array Color Target See Array Color Target on page 3 49 Projector Color Adjustment See Projector Color Adjustment on page 3 51 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 43 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 3 44 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i Black Level Blending Black Level Blending This function brightens the center regions to match adjacent REPORT 25 Standard blend regions when edge blending multiple projectors The Test Pattern Black Level Blending submenu provides controls that Left Blend Width 0 allow you to adjust the black level hues of multiple adjacent PRAT 0 projected images to create one large seamless display Top Blend Width 0 NOTES 1 Adjust edge blending before adjusting black Bottom Bena WWA es Center Brightness 0 levels 2
134. agnostics amp Calibration Choose the desired internal test pattern to HET Off y z display or select Off to turn off a test pattern Alternatively use the TEST key to 3 Freeze Image le through test patt q cycle through test patterns 4 Color Enable Grey Level 5 Input Peak Detector Input Level Detector Level Detector Threshold Aspect Ratio Overlay Test Pattern Color Swap Set the level of grey to display in the full grey field test pattern 6 7 8 9 11 Freeze Image During Auto Setup 12 Advanced Diagnostics 13 Led Strobe Adjust Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 3 45 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation O CHKISTIE 3 46 Freeze Image Enter a check mark to freeze stop an image on a single frame Use this diagnostic tool to examine in detail a still version of an incoming image that cannot be frozen at the source For example in moving images it is sometimes difficult to observe artifacts such as external de interlacing resizing and signal noise Remove the checkmark to return to normal Color Enable Select which color s you want to see Use this while working with color temperature input levels or other special setup parameters Colors can be enabled disabled by entering the corresponding function code listed on the back of the standard remote keypad Input Peak Detector This is a fast method for defining individual input levels and improving the accuracy of
135. ake new channels using the MAX drive table while running auto setup and YNF is out CCD DYNF 4 Make new channels using the HD table while running auto setup and YNF is in CCI INTERPOLATED COLOR CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control generates an output color map based on interpolating the values for the standard color temperatures in the range of 3200K 9300K It effectively allows you to adjust the color temperature of the image The selected output color table must be on Color Temperature to enable this control SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the interpolated color temperature for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the interpolated color temperature for main video PIIP Set the interpolated color temperature for PIP video EXAMPLE CCI 9300 Set the interpolated color temperature to 9300K for main video D 16 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference CCS SELECT OUTPUT COLOR CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Selects which of several predefined and 4 user defined color maps to use for a specific Input signal 0 MaxDrives All color adjustments are turned off allowing the projector to run at maximum brightness 1 Color Temperature This will allow you to specify a color temperature between 3200 and 9300 based
136. ally Sent in a Message Although you will send and read messages as strings of ASCII characters the actual message travels as a sequence of bytes Each character in this sequence requires 1 byte The example below illustrates a lamp limit is 2000 hours reply from the projector ASCII L P L 2 0 0 0 HEX 0x28 0x4 0x50 0x28 0x21 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x29 C 2 4 Maximizing Message Integrity For additional reassurance and or maximum message integrity you can insert one or two special characters e ACKNOWLEDGMENTS If you want assurance from the projector or group of projectors that a set message has been processed request an acknowledgement The acknowledgement is returned after the message has been received and fully executed by the projector i e in the case of a source switch it is not sent until the switch is complete If the message is not able to execute for some reason i e invalid parameters timeout etc a NAK is returned instead not acknowledge Note that requesting an acknowledgement serves no purpose when included in a request message since the acknowledgement will be redundant to the actual reply from the projector However if requested the acknowledgement from the projector will follow the reply There are two types of acknowledgements e SIMPLE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Insert a character just after the start code This will only return a
137. alog RGB dual SDI HDSI twin HDMI compatibility Compatible with Christie TVC series display wall controllers or other input sources from VGA to QXGA as well as standard HD formats Illumination technology LED RGB LED life rating gt 60 000 hrs brightness 600 ANSI lumens Color temperature range 3200 9300 K gamut Beyond 100 EBU adjustment and control Screen to screen ArrayLOC automatic brightness and color management e Individual Comprehensive Color Adjustment CCA Optical lens type Low distortion zero offset short throw fixed lens with field curvature correction 0 69 1 throw for SXGA 0 64 1 throw for WUXGA screen size range 40 100 diagonal brightness uniformity Brightness uniformity control provides up to 100 uniformity capability for critical applications contrast ratio gt 100 000 1 full field using shutter mode e 1400 1 full field up to 450 1 ANSI Control ports controls e 2 RS232 ports and 1 RS422 port networking Field upgradable software via RS232 network or Ethernet IR remote control GPIO port On board ChristieNET connectivity RJ45 Upgradability software e Christie KoRE 10 bit librarian communication software for field upgrade of firmware Optional inputs See input option modules above accessories other e Wired remote control Physical dimensions See Service Manual P N 020 100368 xx haracteris
138. anid JO Hed anid W7 8 usel5 JO Hed enig W1 Z u 319 JO Wed Pee W1 9 u 19 jo Ped Uaalo W S peu JO Hed enig WTI y P3y JO Hed USAID NWT E peu JO Hed pew NWI Z Spo JOJOD L jueuysnipy g9 enuen uwnjog MOY SULUNJOD ejo 1 SMOY 8J0 1 dmesg Buri dnjas Bull G y B L s6um Bulpusig 3497 1989 J S Y ss uz fug JyBry woog sseujyBlig ya Woyog ssaujyBug 1yBry do sseujy6buig y 7 do sseujyBug Woyog sseuyyBilg do sseujyBug yy ss uzypug ya sseujybug Jajuag UIPIM puajg Lopog UIPIM Puajg do puelg Ury UIPIM Ppuajg YET uJ ped S alqeuz puejg x9e g UPL Bu puejg 19497 49818 Oo NADO TKNOTNOONR DD ssaujybiig JOY 81 wo1j do9 ajqeuz 10109 91 qeu4 10109 ony Ss SHUM JO Hed anig SHUM JO Hed U32919 SHUM JO Hed Pay anig JO Wed U32219 anig Jo Hed pay anig jo Heq anig UBD jo yed eng UBBD JO Hed pay U395 JO Ped U29319 pay Jo ped ang pay Jo Wed u 319 pay JO Wed pay juauysnipy 10109 joajas u0138 INJES 10 09 enue lt or Sl e rra TKNOMOTNO OR DD Jueunsn py sseujybug PUM wol4 sjuauysnipy doo 9 qeuy Wayed S L 3 qeu3 10109 oyny sjuauysn pe Juano josay sjuauysn py 12919 SHUN JO Hed ani SHYM JO Ped U39319 SHUM JO Hed Poy anig JO Ped u 919 an g JO Hed Poy onig jo Hed eng uaald jo ped eng uaald Jo Wed pay UBdI JO Ped U
139. anking to 40 on PIP video LBL IN32 40 Set left blanking to 40 on Slot 3 Input 2 LBL Returns the left blanking value on main video LBL PIIP Returns the left blanking value on PIP video LBL IN12 Returns the left blanking value on Slot 1 Input 2 LDT LEVEL DETECTOR CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This Level Detector control changes the gamma table settings to make it easy for the user to adjust the Input levels It causes the data to be processed so that all levels below a specified value are set to black 0 and all above and including it are set to white 1024 This control takes place before the scaler deinterlacer SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES LDT 1 Turn on level detector LDT 0 Turn off level detector LDV LEVEL DETECTOR VALUE CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The Level Value control specifies the value to be used by the level detector The range is 1 1023 This control takes place before the scaler deinterlacer SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE LDV 500 Set level detector to 500 All data greater than or equal to 500 will be shown in the image Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 39 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE LOC LOCAL SETTINGS
140. anty e Integrated 6 axis adjustment system for precise geometry alignment Full function remote keypad with easy to use menu system Multiple set up memories to manage multiple input sources Extensive scaling capability Window screen processing external inputs can be displayed across an array of screens up to 3 x 3 without an external processor a single input must be distributed to all cubes or it can be daisy chained through the cube s optional Twin HDMI module e 3x redundant cooling fans Innovative water filled sealed heat pipe cooling system maintenance free no motorized pumps hazardous chemicals or concern of leakage LED lifetime is based on expected useful life 50 of original brightness Brightness specifications are at reduced color space settings 3The contrast ratio specified is the natural contrast ratio measured by both full field and ANSI methods Such values are critical for proper contrast performance assessment especially for video walls 4For best long term performance and reliability Christie recommends that all electronic equipment such as projection systems are regularly operated at temperatures below 77 F 25 C Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix A Interconnect Drawing Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 A 1 CHRISTIE A 1 INTERCONNECT DRAWING Yellow Green 016
141. arrow to open the drop down list 2 Locate and select the desired option Menu Preferences 1 Large Menu Font Display Channel List Display Slidebars Display Error Messages Serial ports 7 _ Drop down list Menu Type Splash Screen Default Splash Screen Cascading Menus Figure B 9 Types of Menu Elements Selecting or clearing a check box To select or clear a check box click the check box with your mouse pointer This enables or clears the option respectively Clock setting 1 Click within the field i e Lamp Regeneration Start Time option to Sais a Fie allow access 1 Date 2000 H o Ms 2 Time 2 Change the Hour Minute and Seconds fields double digit field entry as required B 6 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE B 3 4 Admin Tab System Appendix B Web UI Under the Admin tab select the System secondary tab to upgrade upload backup and restore specific files change the Logo position background color gamma properties and interrogate the projector creating a zip file of information CHRISTIE Lemon iron Prem c AMA Select File Type B et Select File Type ARs Select File Type NT o D E F E Logo Position and Badkground Color Gamma Properties Projector Date and Time El 2010 04 15 15 32 41 Figure B 10 Admin
142. as peak white and detail is lost in the brightest parts of the image This condition is known as crushing If the setting is too low the image will be dimmer than it need be Start from a lower setting and adjust upwards until just below the point where white is crushed SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the contrast on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 0 1000 MAIN Set the contrast on the main video to the specified value in the range 0 1000 PUP Set the contrast on the PIP video to the specified value in the range of 0 1000 EXAMPLES CON 500 Set contrast to 500 on Main video CON MAIN 500 Set contrast to 500 on Main video CON PIIP 250 Set contrast to 250 on PIP video CON IN32 100 Set contrast to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 CON Returns the current contrast value on Main video CON PIIP Returns the current contrast value on PIP video CON IN12 Returns the current contrast value on Slot 1 Input 2 D 20 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference CRM CHROMA LUMA DELAY CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Chroma Luma delay adjusts the time delay between the chroma and the luminance signals in decoded signals Adjust the delay to eliminate shadows occurring with adjacent colors It is useful only for video images p
143. ase and filter Noise is very common on YPbPr signals from a DVD player Make Sure the video input is terminated 75 ohms If it is the last connection in a loop through chain the video input must be terminated at the last source input only The input signal and or signal cables carrying the input signal may be of poor quality If the distance between the input source device and the projector is greater than 25 feet signal amplification conditioning may be required If the source is a VCR or off air broadcast detail may be set too high 6 6 ArrayLOC 6 6 1 Cannot Find Color Adjustment Controls Use the color adjustment options under the ArrayLOC menu access Main menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC Color Adjustments by X Y and Color Saturation options are not available for general use They are part of the passcode protected Service menu 6 6 2 Color Image Settings Are Greyed Out To enable ArrayLOC access Main menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Bright ColorLOC Mode and set to Fixed Cool or Bright If ArrayLOC is enabled ArrayLOC handles brightness and color settings and overrides other color settings for example Advanced Image Settings gt Color Settings Main menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target color settings are available for the master projector and are greyed out for all other projectors To make your projector the master access Main menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Synchr
144. assigned number or address just before the 3 character ASCII Function code See C 2 7 Network Operation Function Code The projector function you wish to work with such as channel selection or gamma is represented by a 3 character ASCII code A Z upper or lowercase This Function code appears immediately after the leading left bracket that starts the message In messages sent to the projector that do not have a Subcode a space between the Function code and the first parameter or special character is optional Subcode The projector function you wish to work with may have one or more subcodes that will allow you to select a specific source image channel or subfunction The Subcode is represented by a 4 character ASCII code A Z upper or lowercase and 0 9 This Subcode appears immediately after the Function code with a character Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHK IS TIE Appendix C Serial Command Overview to separate the code and subcode If there is no Subcode the plus sign is also omitted In messages sent to the projector that do have a subcode a space between the subcode and the first parameter or special character is optional Request Reply Symbols If the controller is requesting information from the projector a question mark appears directly after the Function code If the projector is replying an exclamation mark appears di
145. but not dripping 3 Gently wipe the surface using a figure 8 motion Repeat this motion until the blemish is removed Do not use a cleaning solvent that contains ammonia Avoid lens contact with Xylene and Ether External Projector Covers As required Clean Clean dust from external covers using a clean lint free cotton cloth as required NOTE Before cleaning the modules it is recommended that you install the lens cap This will keep dust particles from settling on the glass surface of the lens ASSY Dual Fan Pack EM P N 003 002138 xx ASSY Dual Fan Pack PHM P N 003 002676 xx Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Every 5 years or 45 000 hours which ever comes first Remove and replace Refer to the Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 Service Manual P N 020 100368 04 for complete replacement instructions 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 Light Module Replacement Do not service the projector while it is still connected There are exposed voltages that could cause severe physical injuries and possibly death Always disconnect the projector and wait two minutes to allow the power supply capacitors to electrically discharge before removing the projector covers Power should always be disconnected from the illumination module before servicing to avoid the possibility of inadvertent exposure to visible LED radiation Directly viewing the illumination module op
146. by PIP INM 1 Show in menu for the channel being used by main INM PIIP 1 Show in menu for the channel being used by PIP INM MAIN 0 Hide in menu for the channel being used by main INM C001 0 Hide in menu for channel 1 ITG TEST PATTERN GREY CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Specify the grey level to use for the Grey flat field internal test pattern Range 0 1023 The level defaults to 512 on power up This command is on available while the grey test pattern is being displayed SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE ITG 512 Set test pattern grey to mid point D 36 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference ITP INTERNAL TEST PATTERN CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Puts a test pattern on the screen or queries the test pattern currently displayed Select which test pattern to display from the list 0 Off 4 Flat Grey 8 Color Bars 1 Grid 5 Black 11 Aspect Ratio 2 Grey 6 Checker 12 Edge Blend Scale 16 7 13 Point 14 Boresight 3 White SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable disable or change standard test patterns EXAMPLE ITP 0 Disable test patterns revert to previous Input signal ITP 1 Set test pattern to the grid pat
147. by the projector you can override the setting Valid values are 0 YCbCr 4 4 4 or RGB 1 YCbCr 4 2 2 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the sampling mode on Slot x Input y Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 61 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE SMP SAMPLING MODE Cont d MAIN Set the sampling mode on main video PIIP Set the sampling mode on PIP video EXAMPLES SMP 1 Set sampling mode to YCbCr422 on main video SMP MAIN 0 Set sampling mode to YCbCr444 on main video SMP PIIP 1 Set sampling mode to YCbCr422 on PIP video SMP IN32 1 Set sampling mode to YCbCr422 on Slot 3 Input 2 SMP Returns the current sampling mode value on main video SMP PIIP Returns the current sampling mode value on PIP video SMP IN 12 Returns the current sampling mode value on Slot 1 Input 2 SOR SCREEN ORIENTATION CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Selects the orientation of the displayed image It can be displayed normally inverted horizontally inverted vertically or inverted in both directions as required by the projector installation Valid values are 0 Front Projection 1 Rear Projection 2 Front Projection Inverted 3 Rear Projection Inverted SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE SOR 0 Set image orientation to Front proje
148. ccept data graphics and video input signals for projection onto flat front or rear projection screens Projection Head j M Electronics Module Module PHM Light Module a 1 2 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHX IS TIE i Section 1 Introduction 1 4 1 1 4 2 Projection Head Module PHM The PHM is the center module of the projector It contains the projection lens IR sensor Digital Mirror Device DMD light module and other optical components It also supplies the electrical interfaces required to drive these components The projector light module LM consists of 3 LEDs and combining optics There are 2 PHM models available with the Entero one with SXGA resolution and another with WUXGA resolution Main Power Switch Power should always be disconnected from the illumination module before servicing to avoid the possibility of inadvertent exposure to visible LED radiation Directly viewing the illumination module optical output through certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye hazard The Main Power Switch is located above the AC receptacle on the Illumination Module LM Place this switch in the OFF position to cut all power to the projector before disconnecting from an AC wall outlet Electronics Module EM The EM module contains the main electronics and input connectors of the projec
149. cked Only 3 14 deleting channels 3 14 Detail Settings menu 3 28 Diagnostics amp Calibration 3 45 Digital Mirror Device DMD 1 4 dim image See clamp location Dimensions 7 5 Direct Loop 3 31 Display status 6 2 Display Automatic Message Boxes Menu Preferences 3 33 Display Error Messages Menu Preferences Menu Preferences 3 33 display font 3 32 Display User Message Boxes Menu Prefer ences 3 33 Domain Name 3 36 drop down lists menus 3 9 dual link DVI input card See DVI input card dual SD HD SDI input card 2 4 DVI digital video 2 3 DVI input card 2 3 Dynamic Iris adaptive contrast 3 23 E Edge Blend test pattern 3 41 Edge blend widths 3 44 Edge Blending 3 41 procedure 3 43 edge blending disabling using Func key 3 6 editing channels 3 15 editing text 3 6 activing edit windows 3 9 changing case 3 9 Electrical hazards DANGER 5 2 5 4 Electromagnetic compatibility 7 2 electronics module EM 1 3 EM Network 3 54 Emissions specifications 7 2 Enable Decoder AGC 3 22 Index 2 Enter key remote keypad 3 6 Enter Standby After min power manage ment 3 32 entering negative numbers 3 6 Environmental regulations 7 2 Error codes 6 3 Error Messages System Warnings Errors 6 1 Ethernet Settings 3 35 to 3 36 Exit key remote keypad 3 7 Eye damage DANGER 5 1 Eye Motion Filter 3 29 3 40 F Fade Time 3 61 Fan Assist power management 3 32 Fan packs repl
150. ct EBU color gamut as target TCS RDCX 290 Set current Target gamut red x point to 0 290 TCS BLEY Return value of EBU preset blue y point TCS COPY 3 Copy settings from HD Video to current TED TWIN HDMI EDID TYPE SELECTION CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the preferred EDID Timings on the Twin HDMI Input card Available Models are 0 Default 1 3D 2 Custom NOTE 3D option 1 is not supported for Entero or Matrix StIM SIM SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLxy Set the EDID timings on Slot x to the specified type EXAMPLES TED SL31 2 Set EDID type to 2 Custom on Slot 3 Input 1 TED SL12 Returns the current EDID type on Slot 1 Input 2 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 67 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE TIL TILING CONTROL CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the projector as part of a tiled array NOTE TIL cannot be used with native warping SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Enable or disable tiling RTOT Set the total number of rows in the projector array CTOT Set the total number of columns in the projector array RVAL Set the row number of this projector CVAL Set the column number of this projector EXAMPLES TIL SLCT 1 Enable tiling TIL RTOT 2 Set the total number
151. ction SPS SPLASH SCREEN CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Upload a User Splash Screen logo bitmap and configure splash screen display options D 62 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference SPS SPLASH SCREEN Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt View Set option indicating when a logo is displayed Valid values are 0 Always OFF 1 Display on Startup only 2 Display on Startup and when there is no Signal SLCT View Set which logo to display Valid values are 0 Default Splash Screen 1 User Splash Screen EXAMPLES SPS Get the display option If 0 logo is always OFF 1 logo is displayed at start up etc SPS 2 Set the display option Logo will be displayed when there is no signal SPS SLCT 0 Use Christie logo SPT SPLIT SCREEN CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Status DESCRIPTION Split screen enable control Allows a snap shot of the main image to be presented on the right side of the screen to allow evaluation of advanced image processing features All resizing controls are honoured on both images However image processing controls only happen on the left side image Changing Inputs channels or test patterns will disable this control PIP operation must be disabled prior to
152. ctor If a spill occurs immediately disconnect the projector and have it ser viced by a Christie accredited service technician Maintenance and Cleaning The projector is an international regulatory agency approved product designed for safe and reliable operation It is important to acknowledge the following precautions while operating the projector to assure complete safety at all times Warnings and Safety Guidelines Me NV ilo N Always power down and disconnect disengage all power sources to the projector before servicing or cleaning Wa Nle Do not look directly into the projector lens The high brightness of this projector could cause permanent eye damage For protection keep all projector shielding intact during operation Labels and Markings Observe and follow all warnings and instructions marked on the projector The projector is a class 2M source of visible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 5 1 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 5 2 3 Instructions Read all operating instructions prior to using the projector 5 2 4 Projector Location 5 2 5 5 2 Operate the projector in an environment that meets the operating range specified in Section 7 Specifications Do not operate the projector close to water such as
153. d and for your projector model name and serial number In addition the Status menu identifies the current channel its location its frequencies and other details Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation 3 4 6 Secondary Input amp Switching Use the Secondary Input amp Switching menu to enable and define how you want to use either the Picture in Picture PIP or Picture by Picture PBP image Most of the functionality applies the same way when you are making adjustments to the primary image Secondary Image PIP PBP Main Imag Figure 3 17 PIP 8 PBP Example The default is Off until the secondary input source is enabled Main Menu Main Input Dual Link DVI Input Card Slot 1 Input 2_ Secondary Input Dual Link DVI Input Card Slot 1 Input 1 4 PIP Enable 3 5 PIP Window Options Secondary Size amp Position Secondary Image Settings Fade Time 0 20 _ ses 9 Frame Locking Frame Lock E 110 Auto Input Searching O 112 Standby Active Loop Through _ NOTE 70 control the primary image access all picture controls through the Main menu To control the secondary image access picture controls through the Secondary Input amp Switching menu From the Secondary Input amp Switching menu if you choose either PIP or PBP you are limited to a maximum of 60 Hz each Main Input From the list of active I
154. d white are known to be at opposite edges of the image you can watch these isolated areas while adjusting individual black levels and input drives until both black and white edges are just visible and distinguished from neighboring pixels Images from this source will then display correct blacks and whites without crushing To adjust levels manually Do not enable Auto Input Levels e To judge by eye and adjust levels manually change one or more of the six levels as necessary to obtain proper blacks and whites 1 Display a 16 level greyscale test pattern from the desired external source and check the Input Peak Detector check box NOTE The Input Peak Detector will initially render the greyscale as a uniform grey field before adjustment or extreme crushing 2 Check Auto Color Enable to ensure the correct color is displayed for each setting Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 25 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i 3 For the current color adjust its corresponding Blacklevel slide bar just until a single solid band of black appears at one edge of the screen This band represents the first band of the greyscale pattern It should be 100 black 4 With the same color still active adjust its corresponding Input Drive slide bar just until a single band of color appears at the opposite edge of the screen This band represents the last band of the greyscale pattern which should be 100 white or the
155. ddenly PTA A AAA aia 6 6 6 5 10 Colors in the Display Are Inaccurate oooocincccnoccconoconnconnnonnnonnnonancnnn nono nc nono cnn o cono cron cnica nccanns 6 6 6 211 Display Is No Recta 6 6 A cu rexei seat eceinete ce cauccsod ance oneunet Pa eeneGee ee 6 7 A A ants vedepuacvacuaimawseawnannease sh vn bean EO E RE 6 7 6 6 1 Cannot Find Color Adjustment Controls c cccssscsssccsetscssccssccesscessasesscessccesscsssesesanesees 6 7 6 6 2 Color Image Settings Are Greyed Diarias indi 6 7 6 6 3 Sensor Isn t Calibrated Yellow Alert ruina 6 7 6 6 4 Invalid Target Gamut Yellow Alert oooooninccinnccnocococccononononononoconc conc conn coo nonnn cono cconn con nncnnno 6 7 6 6 5 Unable to Achieve Target Brightness Gamut Yellow Alert ooooooncninncnincninccnnccconcconocnnoos 6 8 6 6 6 ArrayLOC Troubleshooting Tree Matching Projectors for Color and Brightness 6 9 6 6 7 ArrayLOC Troubleshooting Tree Continued Array Brightness Setup ccceeeeeeeeeee 6 10 6 6 8 ArrayLOC Troubleshooting Tree Continued Array Color Setup ooooconoccnnoccnoccconncconcconoss 6 11 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHX IS TIE Table of Contents 7 Specifications FN Regulatory ecrin an a T E AEE EEE E EEEa 7 1 P ESE a A E E A N E E 7 1 7 1 2 Environmental RC OU ALHGINS a iii 7 2 A inact csr sug cease pene acta gaeea eam rea ee 7 2 7 1 4 Electromagnetic Compatibility sii 7 2 Fe Mig IMMUN en
156. den to the point where one large stripe fills the image If the image still exhibits some shimmer or noise adjust Pixel Phase below Pixel Phase Adjust Pixel Phase after Pixel Track Adjust pixel phase when the image usually from an RGB source still shows shimmer or noise after pixel tracking is optimized Pixel phase adjusts the phase of the pixel sampling clock relative to the incoming signal Adjust the slide bar until the image stabilizes and each pixel is clearly defined You may notice that you can stabilize the image at more than one point i e you may find that the image appearance at 11 is identical to the image appearance at 38 thus you can use either setting If some shimmer from a video or HDTV source persists use the Filter control to remove high frequency noise from the signal See Filter on page 3 23 H Position Moves the image right or left within the area of available pixels NOTE The value shown represents where the approximate center of the image lies in relation to the total number of pixels available horizontally This varies widely according to the signal watch the image while adjusting V Position Moves the image up or down within the area of available pixels NOTE The value shown represents where the approximate center of the image lies in relation to the total number of pixels available vertically This varies widely according to the signal watch the image while adjus
157. deo to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PIIP Set the green black level on the PIP video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 EXAMPLES GNB 128 Set green black level to 128 on Main video GNB MAIN 128 Set green black level to 128 on Main video GNB PIIP 100 Set green black level to 100 on PIP video GNB IN32 100 Set green black level to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 GNB Returns the current green black level value on Main video GNB PIIP Returns the current green black level value on PIP video GNB IN 12 Returns the current green black level value on Slot 1 Input 2 D 32 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference GND GREEN DRIVE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The green drive level is used to compensate for different amounts of attenuation between the Red Green and Blue in the signal Available on all cards expect the Video decoder The correct setting achieves maximum contrast without crushing white or black When the drive and black level controls are set correctly for a signal the Comprehensive Color Adjustment including color temperature will work as expected The drive and black level controls should not be used to setup a specific color temperature as this will require separate color temperature adjustments to be made f
158. des sometimes called Sync On Green SOG In this mode the H C and V connectors are not used The Sync is connected to the Green Y BNC connector This card offers no loop out capability There are 2 LED s on the module faceplate PWR indicates power has been applied and the card is initialized Signal indicates a valid signal has been detected Analog Input 108 309101 01 Red Pr Green Y Blue Pb Dual SD HD SDI Input Card This card accepts both standard definition SD and high definition HD serial digital interface SDI signals from one of two SD or HD SDI sources Both single link HD and dual link HD signals are accepted The card has two SD HD SDI outputs each of which is loop through for its respective input There are three LEDs on the module faceplate PWR indicates power has been applied and the card is initialized and the two signal LEDs indicate a valid signal has been detected on the respective input Dual SD HD SDI Input 108 313101 01 Video Decoder Input Card This card accepts and decodes SD video This includes CVBS composite video S Video and component sources This card supports as many as 6 video signals four of them on BNC connectors and 2 on 4 pin mini DIN connectors Each mini DIN connector accepts one S Video signal The first BNC accepts composite video only while the remaining 3 BNCs can be grouped to allow one of the following combinations e 3 CVBS sources on 4 5 amp 6 e 1 CVBS
159. djustment Reset current adjustments to defaults 2 Projector Color Adjustment settings are specific to each color AMAR Oy space To use existing fine tuning adjustments as a starting Test Pattern Enable point select a tuned color space from Copy Adjustments Copy Adjustments From Maximum z From White Brightness Adjustment 100 0 A 3 Check both Auto Color Enable and Test Pattern Enable the system background color changes to the target color being adjusted for example Target Red x invokes a red background All other menu options change the system color to white as long as Test Pattern Enable is checked 4 Navigate to Main Menu gt Configuration gt Communication Note the IDs of the projectors you want to fine tune 5 To adjust white color and brightness settings repeat for each projector that needs adjustment a Press PROJ lt PROJECTOR ID gt on the remote The remote directs commands to the specified projector only b Use the White Brightness Adjustment to roughly match the white brightness of the array A higher value makes the projector image brighter c Adjust the Red Part of White Green Part of White and Blue Part of White to match the white color to other projectors in the array d Readjust the White Brightness Adjustment control if matching white colors revealed mismatched white brightness 6 Navigate to Main Menu gt Configuration gt Communication Note the IDs of the projectors you want to fine tune
160. dress of the first ethernet controller PORT Set the PORT number SUBO Set the network subnet mask for the first ethernet controller EXAMPLES NET ETHO 192 168 1 35 Set new IP address on the first ethernet controller NET GATE 192 168 0 1 Set the gateway NET SUBO 255 255 255 0 Set the subnet mask on the first ethernet controller NET HOST MyHostName Set the host name NET DOMA MyDomainName Set the domain name NET ETHO Get IP address from first controller NET ETHO 192 168 1 35 NET ETH1 Get IP address from second controller NET ETH1 192 168 1 36 NET MACO Get MAC address from first controller NET MACO 00 12 3F 7B 76 B4 NET GATE Get default gateway NET GATE 192 168 0 1 NET PORT 3002 Set the Port number NET PORT Get the Port number NET PORT 3002 D 44 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference NRB BLOCK ARTIFACT REDUCTION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Block Artifact Reduction BAR locates and reduces block edges produced by discrete cosine transform DCT based compression processing SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the BAR for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the BAR for main video PIIP Set the BAR for PIP video EXAMPLE NRB 32 Set the BAR to mid point for
161. dule test patterns may be displayed black white or horizontal ramp LED Strobe Adjust During power up the projector will automatically optimize LED strobe timing the time between when a LED is told to turn on versus when it actually does turn on If the strobe timing is not optimal color banding may be seen on grey levels Use this advanced option to correct color banding by adjusting the slider left or right as required Service This option is accessed from the Configuration menu It is passcode protected and intended for use by accredited Christie service technicians only Option Card Settings Accessed from the Configuration menu this menu allows adjustment of any settings specific to each option card that is currently installed in the projector Option Card Settings 1 Dual Link DVI Input Card Dual Link DVI Input Card 1 EDID Timings For Input 1 Default 2 EDID Timings For Input 2 Default Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 3 47 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i 3 48 ArrayLOC Menu Use this menu to set up your projector array color and brightness By default ArrayLOC is enabled and configured to automatically display a moderately saturated gamut at the maximum brightness the array can support If array colors must be adjusted or if an individual projector must be matched to the array see Managing Colors with j ArrayLOC on page 3 55 Projecto
162. e SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the red drive on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 MAIN Set the red drive on the main video to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PIIP Set the red drive on the PIP video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 EXAMPLES RDD 128 Set red drive to 128 on main video RDD MAIN 128 Set red drive to 128 on main video RDD PIIP 100 Set red drive to 100 on PIP video RDD IN32 100 Set red drive to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 RDD Returns the current red drive value on main video RDD PIIP Returns the current red drive value on PIP video RDD IN 12 Returns the current red drive value on Slot 1 Input 2 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 55 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE D 56 RGB ADVANCED COLOR SETTING CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adjusts native projector color space by adjusting the LED power levels This can significantly increase brightness of unsaturated colors These adjustments turn on multiple RGB LEDs simultaneously which uses more power and increases the possibility of over heating SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE CLRM Color Mode Selects 1 Native 4 User preset 2 2 EBU 5 User preset 3 3 User preset 1 6 User
163. e EM Keypad command sent Command received Flashing green e System error see 6 2 2 Error Codes Solid Red Key press error Flashing red e Wrong protocol sent blank Waiting to establish a connection with PHM blank Rotating Initializing hardware and connecting to PHM 6 2 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Section 6 Troubleshooting 6 2 2 Error Codes If the status display window shows one of the codes in the Error Codes table you may need a Christie accredited service technician to repair the component identified by the error code Error codes are displayed in a three phase format e First two digits represent the component or error category e Second two digits represent the specific problem e Display off This cycle repeats The LED will be red while the error code is displayed Acknowledge and clear the error by pressing EXIT twice when at the presentation level no OSD on the screen If the error recurs then try resetting the projector by powering OFF and ON again Contact the dealer if the problem persists or if you see a code not listed in Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Error Codes Error Code Item Description Light Engine 00 Light engine Boot Failure 01 Light engine link error LE 02 Light engine initialization error 03 Red LED Feedback Failure 04 Green LED Feedback Failure 05 Blue LED Feedback Failure Lin
164. e displayed signal data PIP H Position Moves the image right or left within the area of available pixels NOTE The value shown represents where the approximate center of the image lies in relation to the total number of pixels available horizontally This varies widely according to the signal watch the image while adjusting PIP V Position Moves the image up or down within the area of available pixels NOTE The value shown represents where the approximate center of the image lies in relation to the total number of pixels available Vertically This varies widely according to the signal watch the image while adjusting PIP Border Width Enables the optional border around the PIP image When enabled a one pixel wide border will surround the PIP image When disabled no border will be displayed PIP Border Color This control allows you to choose the color of the optional border around the picture in picture image The border can be disabled by setting the width to zero Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE i Section 3 Operation Secondary Size amp Position Most controls in the Secondary Size and Position menu adjust the PIP secondary image in the same fashion as their counterparts in the main Size and Position menu Keep Aspect On Auto Setup Ensures that Auto Setup for any source will maintain the input aspect ratio when the default size is calculated If disabled
165. eatures All resizing controls are honoured on both images however image processing controls only happen on the left side image Changing inputs channels or test patterns will disable this control NOTE P7P operation must be disabled prior to enabling this control Noise Reduction Settings Noise Reduction Noise Reduction Settings Selects a filter sensitivity to noise A higher value may improve noisy sources but it will soften the image Block Artifact Reduction Locates and reduces block edges produced by discrete Split Screen cosine transform DCT based compression processing Full Screen Eye Motion Filter e Mosquito Noise Reduction Eye Motion Filter A sm Noise Reduction Block Artifact Reduction Mosquito Noise Reduction Reduces mosquito artifacts around sharp edges in DCT based compression by dynamically adapting to image content Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 3 Operation e Split Screen This control allows a snapshot of the main image to be presented on the right side of the screen to allow evaluation of advanced image processing features All resizing controls as well as input card features such as color tint etc are honored on both images Image processing controls such as the detail texture noise reduction and adaptive contrast features however only happen on the left side image Changing inputs channels or test patterns will
166. ect an Input for the main image Press INPUT again to show the list and select the secondary image For more information about channels inputs and slots see 3 3 Using Inputs and Channels on page 3 10 PIP Switches the secondary image Picture In Picture or Picture By Picture ON or OFF Swap Swaps the main and secondary images Contrast Changes the level of peak white in your images Use LEFT RIGHT arrow key until you reach the desired level of contrast For best results start low and increase so that whites remain bright but are not distorted or tinted and that light areas do not become fully white i e crushed Conversely low contrast causes dim images Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHK IS TIE Section 3 Operation Bright Increases or decreases the black level in the image Use LEFT RIGHT arrow key until you reach the desired level of brightness For best results start high and decrease so that dark areas do not become fully black i e crushed Conversely overly high brightness changes black to dark grey causing washed out images Gamma Determines how grey shades are displayed between minimum input black and maximum input white for a given amount of signal The proper setting helps maintain optimized blacks and whites while ensuring a smooth transition for the in between values utilized in greys Unlike brightness and contrast controls the overa
167. ee A A 7 2 T2 Entero Sp cifications MMMM A EEEE ORTE TONT TETERE NEEE EERS 7 3 TDA Display nunon E E A E EEE 7 3 T22 EENS ES o 7 4 7 2 3 Power Requirements a O 7 4 T24 Light Modul sisissisiienniarsn enaa E eee 7 4 T23 Physical SPEAR 7 5 Maximum Product Dimensions L x W x H dao 7 5 PLOQUEL Weight espuma 7 5 7 2 6 Projector Dimensions and Mounting Information ocoooccincccnoccconcnoncnoncconnccononnnnc nan ccon nc cononnnos 7 5 T2 I EOI a 7 7 Operating Environment ii at 7 7 Non Operating Environment iio 7 7 7 2 8 Standard and Optional Components asi cdas 7 7 Standard Components dio 7 7 Optional Accessories preniest E EN A A RN 7 7 Ko DUS A Qu a 7 8 A Interconnect Drawing A 1 Interconnect Drawing Ree ee ee nr ee are Eee oe Poe eee ee eee ere eee ee ere A 3 B Web User Interface BA Logging na ins B 1 B 2 Navigating the Web User Meat sia B 3 o E E cc cava aus seats r uname ates detec sun estes nated eee B 3 A A eee nee ees B 3 B31 Main Tabs Conlara ad B 3 B 3 2 Main Tabo MaS a B 4 Bus Tools Tab Viral OSD sssrinin an aE as a NEEE ER EEKE N B 4 Vitt al QSD Mia B 5 B 34 Admin Tab SM B 7 Uploading a Logo File or Gamma File oooooccnnccciococoncconcconccconoconn nono nono nccono cnn n cono ccon cnc ncnnnnnos B 8 Creating a Backup File ai iii ide pii didas B 8 Restoring PS is B 8 Performing a Diagnostic Test using Interrogator ooooconccnoccnonccnoncconncconocann cono corona cono cnnnconnnns B 9 Bas dm Tab US B 9 Creating a
168. el in the bottom right zone LFTW Changes edge blending black level width of the left zone RHTW Changes edge blending black level width of the right zone TOPW Changes edge blending black level width of the top zone BTMW Changes edge blending black level width of the bottom zone EXAMPLES EBB CNTV 100 Set black level blend offset of center zone to 100 EBB LFTW 200 Set black level blend width of left zone to 200 EBB RHTW Get black level blend width of right zone D 24 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 EBL EDGE BLENDING CONTROL GROUP Config Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control the edge blending settings so that any of the four edges can be blended with an adjacent projector to achieve an overlapped and seamless image SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Enables or Disables standard edge blending mode or choose a saved TWIST blending preset LFTW Changes edge blending width of the left edge LFTM Changes edge blending curve midpoint of the left edge LFTS Changes edge blending curve slope at the midpoint on the left edge RHTW Changes edge blending width of the right edge RHTM Changes edge blending curve midpoint of the ri
169. emote keypad commands buttons 3 3 using 3 1 Reset Current Adjustments To Defaults 3 51 Reset Keystone Settings 3 39 Resize Presets 3 17 to 3 18 RGB color space 3 21 part of each color 3 51 RGB Brightness 3 55 RGB Brightness Target 3 51 RGB Quantization Range 3 24 RS 232 options 3 34 Index 3 Index RS 232 and Ethernet Joined 3 35 RS 232 and RS 422 Joined 3 35 RS 422 options 3 34 Rx projector red CIE 1931 x capability 3 53 RY projector red CIE 1931 Y capability 3 53 Ry projector red CIE 1931 y capability 3 53 S saccatic eye motion artifacts See Eye Mo tion Filter Safety specifications 7 1 safety laser point specifications 3 7 power 1 3 visible LED radiation 1 1 warnings and guidelines 1 1 Sampling Mode 3 23 saturation color 3 23 Screen Image Orientation 3 30 Secondary Advanced Image Settings 3 61 Secondary Blanking 3 61 Secondary Image Settings 3 61 Secondary Input 3 59 Secondary Input amp Switching 3 59 Secondary Input Levels 3 61 secondary inputs switching See secondary input Secondary Size amp Position 3 61 Secondary Video Options 3 61 Select Channel Operation menu channels Select Channel Operation menu 3 14 selecting inputs See switching inputs Separate network routing option 3 35 Serial RS 232 IN Options 3 34 Serial RS 232 OUT Options 3 34 Serial RS 422 Options 3 34 Serial Command Reference C 1 D 1 Serial commands control types C 7
170. en Daily Weekly or Monthly repeat options are selected NOTE Depending on the frequency option you select the Repeat Every option may be highlighted on the tab Use this area to enter the frequency of each event 4 Click within the Start Time field to open a calendar pop up window Navigate to and choose a desired date The selected date will populate the Start Time field 6 In the field below the Start Time field enter a start time in the format hr min sec The default is the current time 7 Click Sync to set the computer and projector time to be the same otherwise the event will run based on the projector time Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix B Web UI 10 Enter a description of the scheduled event in the Description field NOTE Maximum of 100 characters Enter a serial command or a sequence of serial commands that you want the projector to perform in the Command String box If a GPIO command string is needed click the GPIO Output Helper button for instructions on how to create the command structure NOTES 1 The Output field contains 7 blocks which refer to the 7 I O pins on the GPIO connector Pin 1 12V and Pin 5 Ground These are not included 2 Clicking a block toggles between H L and X See Figure B 15 See Appendix D Serial Command Reference for detailed information GPIO Event Input Condition XXXIII Figure B 15 GPIO Output Helper
171. enabled are e The PIP border is disabled e Cascading menus are turned OFF e Menus show only 5 items with a scroll bar to allow the rest of the menu items to be reached Keystone and Warp are not supported with Tiling enabled e Projector source switching in the array is not synchronized Therefore some latency can be seen from when the commands are issued to each projector causing switching to not be as seamless when in a tiling configuration NOTE When the FUNC HELP key combination is pressed the tiling settings will be cleared Tiling and Frame Lock Issues If while using tiling you find that some screens are displaying black when they should be displaying content you may need to turn the frame lock feature off or increase the frame delay settings To turn the frame lock off go to the Configuration gt Output Options menu and select Free Run from the Frame Locking drop down list You can also use the serial API command FLE 0 To increase the frame delay setting navigate to the Configuration gt Output Options menu select Frame Lock from the Frame Locking drop down list and then drag the Set Frame Delay slider across to a value slightly higher than the minimum value shown in the Actual Frame Delay field You can also use the serial API command FRD STAT to query for minimum frame lock setting and then use FRD nnn where nnn is slightly higher than the minimum value returned Diagnostics amp Calibration IAEA Di
172. enabling this control Valid options are 0 OFF 1 Side 2 Top SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES SPT 1 Turn ON split screen to the side SPT 0 Turn OFF split screen SST SYSTEM STATUS CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Status DESCRIPTION Retrieve the various system status groups SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Returns information on all status groups with one message per item ALRM Returns a summary of any active alarms CONF Returns configuration data model sn build date etc Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 63 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE SST SYSTEM STATUS Cont d COOL Returns cooling data cooling fans air flow etc HLTH Returns system health LAMP Returns LAMP operational data SIGN Returns signal data freq etc SYST Returns system data power hours of use shutter open etc TEMP Returns temperature data VERS Returns version numbers EXAMPLES SST ALRM returns SST ALRM 000 002 101 Prism temperature where parameters are P1 index number P2 error level P3 value P4 description Error level is 0 no errors or warnings 1 warning 2 error 3 error and warning STD VIDEO STANDARD CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION T
173. ens MINB Minimum Brightness Sets the minimum brightness as a percentage of target brightness that the projector will display if it is capable 0 100 percent MING Minimum Gamut Sets the minimum gamut as a percentage of the target gamut that the projector will display if it is capable 0 100 percent ADIN Adjustment interval Controls the interval in seconds that this projector will run the Array Bright ColorLOC algorithm 1 9999 BRIN Broadcast interval Controls the interval in seconds that this projector will update the projector array 1 9999 D 1 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE D 2 ABL ARRAY BRIGHT COLOR LOC Cont d ALBV When set to 1 all projectors in the brightness group synchronize to this projector s color settings 0 OFF 1 synchronize group Note A group can synchronize to only one projector Setting ABL ABLV on any projector in a group to make that projector the master projector releases the setting from any previous master projector in the group DEVC Specifies the ethernet port used for transfer of ColorLOC data When selected will use the PHM network ethernet port rather than default EM network ethernet port 0 PHM network 1 EM network WENA FUTURE USE Enable warnings associated with Bright ColorLOC 0 disable 1 enable WBTH FUTURE USE Sets the brightness threshold at which a warning is issued when warnings are enabled
174. ent of gain at bottom right corner UIH1 Get Set the percent of gain at left turn point UIH2 Get Set the percent of gain at right turn point UIP Get Set position of left turn point UI2P Get Set position of right turn point GAIN Get Set overall gain UIRT Restore all parameters to factory default EXAMPLES BRU SLCT Get current state of brightness uniformity 0 is disabled 1 is enabled BRU SLCT 1 Enable brightness uniformity Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 15 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE CCD OUTPUT COLOR DEFAULT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Specifies the default color adjustment to use for new channels This allows the user to specify a standard color and have that color applied by default to all new sources The user may override this for any specific channel Using the default subcode applies a default to be used when creating a new channel using auto setup while the YNF is not in the video path Using the subcode DYNF allows a different color table default to be specified while the YNF is in the video path during auto setup SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Apply a default table to use while running auto setup when a YNF filter is not in place DYNF Apply a default table to use while running auto setup when a YNF filter is in place EXAMPLES CCD 0 M
175. eported for the common gamut navigate to Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt ArrayLOC Status For example see Figure 3 15 2 Measure the projected primary color with the meter and compare the metered values to the common gamut values 3 Use the adjustment guide to determine how to adjust the Projector Color Adjustment values to correct the differences The adjustment guides are color coded The suggested corrections are also color coded and reflect the direction of the change or For example if the measured red is 660 325 and the Common Gamut value is 640 330 then the measured x is high High X while the measured y is low Low Y The corresponding quadrant of the RED guide indicates G increase green to correct the mismatch with other projectors Low X High X Low X High X Red Green R G R Lowy ME G G R Figure 3 16 Red Green Blue and White Color Adjustment Guides Some corrections require both red and green adjustments PAlternative decrease blue B instead of increasing red and green Alternative increase blue B and increase green G instead of decreasing red and increasing green 3 4 5 Status 3 58 The read only Status menu lists a variety of details about the standard and optional components detected in the projector Refer to the Status menu for versions of hardware and software installed the hours logged in total and for a specific period such as a rental perio
176. ere are no simultaneous key combinations required e NOTE To use Power Shutter and OSD functions press the appropriate button and then press the UP arrow to switch ON or the DOWN arrow to switch OFF You can also press and hold the appropriate button for 2 seconds or press it twice quickly Refer to 3 1 1 IR Remote on page 3 2 e Arrow keys are held down for continuous adjustment movement in the related key direction NOTE n serial networks pause briefly between adjustments to make sure that more distant projectors can keep up with the commands If you press a key while the projector is still responding to the previous action such as during power up the second key press may not take effect e Refer to 3 1 1 IR Remote on page 3 2 for the description of those keys provided on the standard IR remote keypad Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 1 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation 3 1 1 IR Remote Test Display a test pattern Power Turn projector ON or OFF Plug In for Remote Keypad Left side of remote keypad Slots e Display the source from the next active input on the card in the selected slot NOTE If PIP is on Input keys affect the PIP window only Input e Select an active or inactive input on any slot PIP Turn picture in picture ON or OFF Menu e Display menus Arrow Keys Adjust a setting up or down Navigate within a menu Channel Se
177. ered to be the master CPU is returned here The return parameters are Type Major Minor Beta The beta value is optional meaning it is an engineering build and has not been validated NOTE List of devices 40 ACT 41 Cinema 42 CinemaMini 43 Media Block 44 Mobius 45 Entero StIM SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE PNG PNG 41 001 000 234 Indicates Cinema type software 1 major 0 minor 234 beta Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 49 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE PPA POSITION PRESET ASPECT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION When enabled this control ensures that during auto setup for any source its aspect ratio is maintained when its default size is calculated This is similar to cases where a stretch is defined for a source in the lookup table If disabled and no stretch is defined the source is scaled to fit the screen SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt This command accepts either 0 or 1 0 disables maintain aspect 1 enables maintain aspect EXAMPLES PPA 0 Disables maintain aspect during auto setup PPA 1 Enables maintain aspect during auto setup PPP PIP POSITION PRESET CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Choose a preset location and size for the
178. es the right to make changes to specifications at any time without notice Performance specifications are typical but may vary depending on conditions beyond Christie s control such as maintenance of the product in proper working conditions Performance specifications are based on information available at the time of printing Christie makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to implied warranties of fitness for a particular purpose Christie will not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the performance or use of this material The product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components that can be recycled and reused This symbol X means that electrical and electronic equipment at their end of life should be disposed of separately from regular waste Please dispose of the product appropriately and according to local regulations In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used electrical and electronic products Please help us to conserve the environment we live in Canadian manufacturing facility is ISO 9001 and 14001 certified GENERAL WARRANTY STATEMENTS For complete information about Christie s limited warranty please contact your Christie dealer In addition to the other limitations that may be specified in Christie s limited warranty the warranty does not cover a Damage occurring during
179. ess bar appears Once finished a File Download window appears Click Save to open a Save As window Locate and select a folder within your Network drive or hard drive where you wish to save the file Click Save Restoring a File 1 Select a file type All Preferences Configuration Channels Users or Real Time Events from the Restore drop down list NOTE Do not select All unless transferring all files from one projector to another or cloning Click the Browse button to locate and select the file you wish to restore from a Network drive location or from your hard drive Click Restore to initiate the restore A Restore in Progress bar appears Once finished a confirmation message appears Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix B Web UI Performing a Diagnostic Test using Interrogator 1 Click Interrogate to initiate the diagnostic test and download the diagnostic test results to your computer A Interrogator in Progress bar appears Once the download is complete a File Download window appears NOTE Once the Interrogate function begins you must allow it to run until completion 2 Click Save to save the diagnostic test results file to your Network drive or hard drive B 3 5 Admin Tab Users Under the Admin tab select the Users secondary tab Options are provided to add to and delete users from accessing the projector and change passwords NOTES 1 Do not use capita
180. ew OSD state read menu structure SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt View change the current state of the OSD 0 presentation 1 main EXAMPLE MNU MNU 000 D 42 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference MSH MENU SHIFT HORIZONTAL CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Change the horizontal position of the main menu If the position is not from one of the preset positions MSP will be changed to Custom SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt View set the horizontal position of the main menu EXAMPLES MSH Get current horizontal position of main menu MSH 50 Set main menu horizontal position to 50 pixels from left edge MSP MENU LOCATION CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the default menu position on the screen Valid options are 0 4 3 TopLeft 1 4 3 Inset 1 2 4 3 Inset 2 3 16 9 TopLeft 4 16 9 Inset 1 5 16 9 Inset 2 6 Center SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt View set the preset menu position EXAMPLES MSP Get current menu position preset MSP 0 Set main menu position to 4 3 TopLeft the top left corner of screen MSP 6 Set menu position to the center of the screen NAM CHANNEL NAME CONTROL GROUP Channel S
181. fined size will be padded with leading zeros as needed Parameters which have negative signs are zero padded after the negative sign and will have one less digit to make space for the sign If entering a negative number there must be a space between the code subcode and the value For example CRM3 and CRM 3 can both be used when the number is positive CRM 2 is acceptable but CRM 2 is not e Data in set messages to the projector do not require padding with zeros e Within each message multiple parameters of data must be separated by one space character e Text parameters such as channel names are enclosed in double quotes following the data as in Name Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual C 3 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Appendix C Serial Command Overview CH IS TIE Text Parameters Most data is consists of numerical values however some messages also require text For example a channel naming message typically includes a text based name Enclose this text in double quotation marks as in Tilt the Wagon Table C 2 lists special characters that require a 2 character combination Table C 2 Special Characters for Text If you want this Enter this Description Backslash vi Quote Left Bracket Right Bracket OX0A n New line if the text can be displayed on more than one line this will set the line break hi Sends one arbitrary code defined by
182. fy numbers representing projector channels source setups or slots As each digit is entered it is inserted on the right of the field and the numbers already in the field are shifted to the left Channel numbers are defined with 2 digits for example if you enter only a single digit such as 7 for a channel number the channel will automatically be defined as 07 Enter 07 to use this channel If you press any non numbered key the number entered up to that point is accepted and updated as the new value Press EXIT to cancel editing of numerical values Using Inputs and Channels The projector allows you to define store and recalls up to 99 different channels customized setups or configurations for a variety of inputs Depending on what you have defined each physical source connection i e input at the projector can have several different channels associated with it e Slot refers to an input card installed in the projector There are 4 Input card slots e Input refers to both the physical connector on the Input card and to the media source connected to it Each Input card can have one or more inputs e Channel refers to the setup parameters for a media source input The parameters include the Slot and Input Input type and Input resolution NOTE See Section 2 Setting Up a Source for a full explanation of how to connect sources to the projector Inputs An input is a source physically connected to the project
183. g zooms the right side of the PIP image Right Blanking zooms the left side There are no black bars _ Example With Blanking 1050 1400 Figure 3 5 Blanking of a Primary Image Blanking Blanking 3 Left Blank 4 Right Blank No PIP blanking Left PIP blanking Similar to a zoom function Figure 3 6 Blanking of a PIP Image Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE i Section 3 Operation 3 4 3 Image Settings Menu Use the Image Settings menu to alter your main image without affecting its size or position Changes made are Cl applied immediately and are saved when you exit the Image Settings f Brightness menu press EXIT or MENU Options not available for the projector model or source are disabled grey 4 Color Space Image color is managed by ArrayLOC see ArrayLOC 5 Video Options Menu on page 3 48 and Managing Colors with 6 Input Levels ArrayLOC on page 3 55 Advanced Image Settings Contrast Contrast increases or decreases the perceived difference between light and dark areas of your image 0 100 For best results keep close to 50 For best results start with a low value and increase so that whites remain bright but are not distorted or tinted and light areas do not become white NOTE f the environment lighting changes an adjustment of Gamma is recommended see below Brightness Increases or decreases
184. ght edge RHTS Changes edge blending curve slope at the midpoint on the right edge TOPW Changes edge blending width of the top edge TOPM Changes edge blending curve midpoint of the top edge TOPS Changes edge blending curve slope at the midpoint on the top edge BTMW Changes edge blending width of the bottom edge BTMM Changes edge blending curve midpoint of the bottom edge BTMS Changes edge blending curve slope at the midpoint on the bottom edge STDC Enable the advanced curve settings OVLP Enables or Disables edge blending overlap control This more will make the active portion of the Blend zone very obvious and is intended to make setup easier EXAMPLES EBL LFTW 100 Set edge blending left width EBL LFTW Get edge blending left width EBL SLCT1 Use standard edge blending mode EBL OVLP1 Enables edge blending overlap mode D 25 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE EME ERROR MESSAGE ENABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control enables the displaying of error messages and determines to which interface the messages are sent Error messages can be turned off or can be displayed on the screen sent out the serial port or both This setting does not affect messages for invalid user entries for which error messages are always displayed Valid values are 0 Off 1 Screen 2 Serial ports 3 All SUBCODE DESCRIPT
185. gital HD SDI SDI Digital SDI The first 5 items in this table are analog RGB with various sync combinations indicating Sync Source when editing the channel Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 3 13 3 14 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i Copying a Channel Highlight the desired channel in the Channel Setup menu then press ENTER to go to the Select Channel Operation submenu Select Copy Channel and press ENTER a new channel will be created It is identical to the original which still remains but it is identified with the next available number from 01 99 If you change your mind and do not want to copy the current channel press EXIT to cancel and return to the previous menu Copying channels is a quick method for creating numerous channels each of which can then be edited and adjusted for a variety of presentations in the future Channel Setup ee Enter 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz nal 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz 3 BO 12 p5W 63 98kHz p60 02Hz Select Channel Operation Edit Channel Copy Channel Delete Channel Delete Unlocked Only Channel Setup A IMI 4 E 1 1 pDVI 77 14KHz p59 94Hz New Channel identical A 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz to Chan 3 1 2 p5W 63 98kHz p60 02Hz Es 1 2 p5W 63 98kHz p60 02Hz Deleting a Channel Highlight the desired channel in the Channel Setup menu then press ENTER to activate the Select Channel O
186. h projector to allow switching back and forth between them while adjustments are being made Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 3 Operation Network Routing NOTE Vot applicable for stand alone projectors or simple serial networks with only one type of controller and linking Networks do not communicate with one another 2 RS232 and RS422 Joined Serial networks are joined but Ethernet is isolated AE AAN RS 232 and Ethernet are joined but RS 422 is isolated 4 All Joined Network communications travel all networks Figure 3 9 Network Routing List Separate Select Separate factory default to keep RS 232 RS 422 and Ethernet messages on their respective paths instead of being broadcast to the other types of ports RS 232 and RS 422 Joined Messages originating from an RS 232 or RS 422 controller will be relayed to all RS 232 or RS 422 ports Any Ethernet communication however will not RS 232 and Ethernet Joined Messages to and from the RS 232 ports will also be relayed to the Ethernet port and vice versa Any RS 422 communications will be isolated In the case of multiple Ethernet sessions over the single Ethernet connector input on the RS 232 port will be relayed to all Ethernet sessions however input from any Ethernet session will only be relayed to the RS 232 ports All Joined All messages reach all ports regardless of type in the case of
187. hannel 20 will fail if 20 already exists CHA DLET 0 Delete all unlocked channels CHA DLET 20 Delete channel 20 CLE COLOR ENABLE CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control allows the three primary colors red green and blue to be turned ON or OFF separately It is used to look at the colors one at a time or in pairs when doing convergence light measurements etc The list of values for this command are 0 White 4 Yellow 1 Red 5 Cyan 2 Green 6 Magenta 3 Blue SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES CLE 1 Display red portion of image only CLE 5 Display green and blue portion of image only CLE 0 Display image normally all primaries CLP CLAMPING CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION For all analog signals a clamping pulse is generated that defines where in the signal a black reference can be found The Clamp Location sets the clamping pulse to one of three possible locations tip back porch amp tri level For most signals the correct position is backporch just after the sync pulse If the signal has no back porch and there is no sync pulse in the RG or B signals clamping can occur at the front or tip of the sync pulse For HDTV signals 10801 amp 720p the clamp must be moved past the positive pulse of the tri level sync pulse so the tri level opt
188. he Input Levels menu automatically disables Auto Input Levels and Auto Color Enable NOTE 70 adjust levels manually see Input Peak Detector on page 3 46 Auto Color Enable When a checkmark is present selecting a specific black level or drive to adjust will automatically enable the corresponding color in the display Delete the checkmark to see all colors or to enable a different specific color through the Color Enable control Clamp Location Brightens the image produced from certain high resolution high frequency graphic sources The projector automatically selects the best clamp location for most sources Use the normal Back Porch location if the image is either sufficiently bright or overly bright Select Syne Tip if the image appears unusually dim if there are horizontal streaks across the image or if there is significant color drift This moves the clamping pulse from the normal back porch location which is likely too short to the tip of the horizontal sync pulse Tri Level is typically needed for an HDTV source Input Peak Detector Input Peak Detector is a tool to assist with defining individual input levels enabling you to accurately set the input levels for any source with the appropriate image Enabling the peak detector activates a special operating mode for detecting only pixels that are considered black or white all other levels are displayed as a mid level grey When used with a smooth greyscale pattern in which black an
189. he Synchronized option to set the projector to listen for remote keystrokes through the ArrayLOC network and the master projector All synchronized projectors respond to the same keystrokes Double key strokes may not register correctly use alternate key commands instead A synchronized projector automatically starts listening to its IR receiver if the master projector becomes unavailable for example if it goes into standby mode You can override the key synchronization by using the Proj key and projector address to communicate with a specific projector or you can use a wired remote with a specific projector Independent indicates that the projector listens to its own IR remote receiver It is the default option Change this setting for each projector individually NOTE ArrayLOC network communication overrides RS 232 serial communication for keys Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Synchronize Frame Delay Use the Synchronized option to synch the frame delay on all the synched projectors in the ArrayLOC group Set the delay value in Set Array Frame Delay NOTE 7o use this synchronization feature set FrameLocking to FrameLOCK See Frame Locking on page 3 30 Independent is the default option Change this setting for each projector individually Set Array Frame Delay This option indicates the current frame delay for all the synched projectors in the ArrayLOC grou
190. he main image PIIP Set the bottom blanking for the PIP image EXAMPLES BBL 40 Set bottom blanking to 40 on main video BBL MAIN 40 Set bottom blanking to 40 on main video BBL PIIP 40 Set bottom blanking to 40 on PIP video BBL IN32 40 Set bottom blanking to 40 on Slot 3 Input 2 BBL Returns the bottom blanking value on main video BBL PIIP Returns the bottom blanking value on PIP video BBL IN12 Returns the bottom blanking value on Slot 1 Input 2 BDR BAUD RATE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Set the baud rate for a serial communications port For RS 232 IN and RS 232 OUT the default is 115200 For RS 422 the default is 19200 The default communications settings for all ports is 8 data bits no parity Valid baud rates with the values to select them are 0 1200 4 38400 1 2400 5 57600 2 9600 6 115200 3 19200 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE PRTA Set the baud rate on port A RS 232 IN PRTB Set the baud rate on port B RS 232 OUT PRTC Set the baud rate on port C RS 422 EXAMPLES BDR PRTA 6 Set baud rate on port A to 115200 bits per second BDR PRTA Get baud rate BDR PRTA 115200 D 10 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference BGC BASE GAMMA CURVE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power D
191. hem as RGB and may incorrectly decode their color information as YPbPr SDTV These signals can include RGB signals in NTSC PAL SECAM frequency ranges Scan doubled sync on green Scan quadrupled sync on green For these signals change the Color Space to RGB then define a new channel for future use Values are 0 RGB 1 YPbPr SDTV 2 YPbPr HDTV SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the color space on Slot x Input y Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 21 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE CSP COLOR SPACE Cont d MAIN Set the color space on Main video PIIP Set the color space on PIP video EXAMPLES CSP 1 Set color space to YPbPr SDTV on Main video CSP MAIN 2 Set color space to YPbPr HDTV on Main video CSP PIIP 1 Set color space to YPbPr SDTV on PIP video CSP IN32 1 Set color space to YPbPr SDTV on Slot 3 Input 2 CSP Returns the current color space value on Main video CSP PIIP Returns the current color space value on PIP video CSP IN12 Returns the current color space value on Slot 1 Input 2 DED DUAL DVI EDID TYPE SELECTION CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the preferred EDID Timings on the Dual DVI Input card Available Models are 0 Default 1 3D 2 Custom NOTE 3D option 1 is not supported for Entero or Matrix
192. her types of video and all graphics sources Generally if black appears crushed when brightness 50 choose 0 IRE If black appears excessively elevated use 7 5 IRE Color This slide bar adjusts the color saturation level Lower settings produce less saturated colors for example a setting of 0 produces a black and white image If the color level is too high colors will be overpowering and unrealistic Tint Adjusts the red green color hue for true color reproduction of video and HDTV signals For best results adjust tint while displaying an external test pattern it is recommended that tint remain at its default setting Filter The proper filter setting is automatically set for virtually all signals and rarely needs to be changed Override only if standard pixel tracking and phase adjustments do not adequately clear up a noisy video signal or if a graphics signal appears overly soft Both instances indicate that Filter may be set to the wrong option Sampling Mode Sets the color sampling mode for a digital signal to either YCbCr 4 4 4 RGB or YCbCr 4 2 2 The proper sampling mode is determined automatically by the projector you can override this setting Film Mode Detect Enable or disable film motion detection Only available for interlaced or segmented frame sources Chroma Luma Delay Affects any incoming composite or S video signal delaying the luma signal intensity in relation to the
193. his control displays or sets the current video standard that is decoding the Input signal You can allow the projector to automatically determine the standard or you can specify a specific standard from the selection list 0 Auto Automatically determined by decoder 1 PAL is a commonly used format in much of Europe China Australia and some South American and African countries 2 NTSC is a commonly used format in North America and Japan 3 SECAM is a format found primarily in France Eastern Europe and much of Africa 4 NTSC44 is a tape only standard and is usually used with hybrid signals used to provide compatibility with video material of another TV format without a complete translation 5 PAL M is a format found primarily in Brazil 6 PAL NC is a format found primarily in Argentina and Chile and some other Latin American countries 7 PAL 60 Only those standards that have similar horizontal and vertical frequencies to the current Input source are enabled SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the video standard on Slot Input y to the specified value in the range of known video standards MAIN Set the video standard on the main video to the specified value in the range of known video standards D 64 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference STD VIDEO STANDARD Cont d PIIP Set the video standard on the PI
194. hoose the color of the optional border around the picture in picture PIP image The border can be disabled by setting the border width PBW to zero Valid options are 0 Black 5 Dark Magenta 10 Green 1 Dark Red 6 Dark Yellow 11 Blue 2 Dark Green 7 Dark Grey 12 Cyan 3 Dark Blue 8 Light Grey 13 Magenta 4 Dark Cyan 9 Red 14 Yellow 15 White SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE PBC 0 Select black PIP border PBW PIP BORDER WIDTH CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Selects whether a border should be placed around the PIP window Setting the width to zero 0 will remove the border Setting it to 1 will enable the border SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLE PBW 10 Select PIP border width of 10 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 47 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE PDT PEAK DETECTOR CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the peak detector test mode This is used to aid in setup of Input levels For each color pixel values very near black will be displayed black pixel values very near peak level will be displayed full on All others will be displayed in mid level grey Input levels for each color should be adjusted so that black pixels in the image j
195. ibration tools and the Service submenu password protected Power Management The first 6 options in the Configuration menu are Date amp Time explained below Menu Preferences Language Communications Choose the language to use in the projector s menus The change will take effect immediately Geometry amp Color Diagnostics amp Calibration Output Options Service _ ob _ oo Screen Image Orientation Option Card Settings Select the on screen image orientation from Front Rear Front Inverted and Rear Inverted Ww ArrayLOC Output Options 1 Screen Image Orientation Front Projection 4 Frame Locking Frame Lock y 5 Set Frame Delay 0 000 m pasm 7 Free Run Frequency 59 94 Main Secondary Loop Frame Locking Select how the projector controls the output frame timing based on the input signal When set to Frame Lock output image frames are locked to the input if possible When locked the output is always locked to the primary input never the PIP image When set to Free Run sets the output to the Free Run Frequency value NOTE Frame locking on projectors in a ArrayLOC network can be controlled from one projector See Synchronize Frame Delay on page 3 55 When Synchronize Frame Delay is used the master projector sets the frame delay for the synched projectors in the array Set Frame Delay This control delays the output signal timing relative to the inpu
196. ify which projectors are included in the ArrayLOC Status report e Group Min Capability includes projectors in the array that meet targets e Group includes all projectors in the ArrayLOC group e None includes all the projectors detected in the ArrayLOC network ArrayLOC Configuration ArrayLOC A LOC Confi ti ArrayLOC Network O Y A A ArrayLOC Network o Select the projector to projector communica tion network configuration for all Ethernet messages related to ArrayLOC functions including ArrayLOC messages and BCLOC messages Synchronize Keys Test Pattern Color Enable Synchronize RGB Brightness Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 53 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation i C S SCC A STE 3 54 EM Network All Ethernet messages related to ArrayLOC flow through the EM Network port of the PHM EM Network EM Network PHM Network EM Network EM Network PHM Network EM Network Nel EM Network PHM Network EM Network EM Network PHM Network EM Network EM Network PHM Network PHM Network All Ethernet messages related to ArrayLOC flow through the PHM Network port of the PHM EM EM Network EM Network PH M PHM Network EM EM Network EM Network PH M PHM Network EM EM Network EM Network PH M PHM Network EM EM Network EM Network PH M PHM Network EM EM Network EM Network PH M PHM Network Synchronize Keys Test Pattern Color Enable Use t
197. ight checkmark To toggle the check box highlight and press ENTER or highlig Figure 3 3 Check Box and use RIGHT arrow key to check and LEFT arrow key to uncheck If a check E a i xample box is numbered enter its number to immediately toggle the check box Drop down lists To see a list of options available for a given parameter Highlight the list and press ENTER or Enter the menu option number e Use the UP arrow key or DOWN arrow key to navigate up and down within the list Press ENTER to choose an option from the list To quickly scroll through a list without first pulling it down highlight the option and use LEFT arrow key or RIGHT arrow key Press ENTER when the desired choice appears NOTES 1 Press LEFT arrow key or RIGHT arrow key to jump between pages in an extra long drop down list 2 Press EXIT while in a drop down list to cancel any change Editing Text Activate the Edit Window To enter or edit text highlight the desired parameter such as a channel name and press ENTER to activate its adjacent edit window Any previously entered text is displayed with its first character highlighted in a square cursor signifying that this character is ready for editing Navigate Within the Edit Window Press RIGHT arrow key to move the cursor forward or LEFT arrow key to move the cursor backwards as desired Cursor highlight Move with lt show2 scroll alphabet Press numbers etc to select and g
198. image in its native resolution no resizing or will resize the image by maximizing either the height width or both height and width or will resize to the maximum size possible while keeping the original aspect ratio Size Position and Blanking parameters will automatically adjust accordingly or if Blanking is set first which defines an Active Input Area Resize Preset scaling will occur in this region of interest only Resizing options are explained below Size p Position Resize Presets Default Size 1 Default maximize for current source Vertical Stretch 2 No Resizing display in native resolution Pixel Track 3 Full Size fill the screen regardless of source Pixel Phase fill display width amp keep aspect ratio H Position 5 Full Height fill display height amp keep aspect ratio V Position 6 Anamorphic retain 16 9 aspect ratio Keep Aspect On Auto Setup _ ee Connon Fr wr Blanking e Select DEFAULT for most sources factory default The image will be centered and displayed as large as possible depending on the type of source By default when displaying a new source your image will use as much of the projector display area as possible for the type of incoming source data but with minimal or no changes to aspect ratio Default If PC or non HDTV If video or 16 10 graphics If 4 3 or 5 4 graphics If HDTV anamorphic signal 1920 1920 1920 1920
199. ime 0 20 sees Frame Locking Frame Lock 10 Auto Input Searching 12 Standby Active Loop Through _ With any of these methods the image will be displayed according to the following e If itis the first time you have used the source input or if you used the input but did not define a channel by adjusting anything the projector will recognize the new input signal based on its frequencies and polarities automatically displaying an image according to default settings for that signal In general the image from the new source will be as large as possible without losing its aspect ratio This and other default image settings depend on the incoming source If you used the source once before and changed a display parameter such as contrast V Position etc then a channel was automatically created and still exists in projector memory see Creating a New Channel on page 3 12 below Using one of the input or slot keys will automatically recall this channel and all its setup parameters and will update the display accordingly If more than one channel exists for the input the image will be displayed according to the setup parameters for the first channel with matching characteristics Channels A channel is a collection of measurements locations and settings that tailor the display of a signal to your specific needs Since source types and applications can vary greatly you will likely want to adjust and define a wide varie
200. ine cord to the AC receptacle on the projector located on the Electronics Module NOTE Use only the line cord supplied with the projector or a power cord of correct ratings that comply with regional standards 2 Connect the 3 pronged end of the line cord to a grounded AC outlet The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible Connecting Sources All source connections are made to the input panel of the Electronics Module Each input is labeled for easy identification Using the correct cable s connect your source Sources are connected to the Input Panel located at the top of the EM The Input Panel has slots for 1 image processor board and up to 4 Input cards Input cards are hot swappable they can be plugged in and out while the projector is running Sources can also be plugged in and out while the projector is running The image processor should only be replaced when the projector is OFF or when it is in STANDBY mode The video card that is installed in your projector determines the type of video source you can use These video cards are supported Twin HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface e Analog BNC Dual SD HD SDI Serial Digital Interface e Dual Link DVI e Video Decoder These cards slide into any of the available Option slots One or more of the Option slots may be used with any combination of option cards including multiples of the same card type There may be up to 2 active Inputs displayed at any
201. ing access to each channel and an abbreviated description of each signal type A Channel Setup Icon legend is provided as a reference Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHRISTIE Section 3 Operation NOTE Use UP and DOWN arrow keys to see the remaining channels not visible in the initial display of Appears in Chan list A Auto source channels Channel Setup 11 BO 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz 2 8 O1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz 13 B 1 2 p5W 63 98kHz p60 02Hz Slot Input Signal Horizontal Vertical Type Frequency Frequency i Interlaced p Progressive An unlocked auto source that appears in the channel list A locked auto source that appears in the channel list Signal Type Locked A Channel Setup Icons The channel list or the Channel Setup menu identifies signal types abbreviations as defined below in Table 3 2 Composite Sync is on the H C input or the V input 4 wire These abbreviations are preceded by either an i interlaced signals or p progressive signal Table 3 2 Abbreviations for Signal Type Abbrev Signal Type No Sync 4WH Composite 4 wire on HC input 4wv Composite 4 wire on V input SG Sync on green 4 wire 5W Separate H V 5 wire 5WR Separate H V swapped 5 wire SVid S Video CVid Composite Video Dig Digital DSDI Digital Dual Link HD SDI DVI Digital DVI HDMI Digital HDMI HSDI Di
202. input levels set by the Auto Input Level function Enabling the Input Peak Detector activates a special operating mode for detecting only pixels that are considered black or white all other levels are displayed as a mid level grey When used with a 16 step greyscale pattern in which the two black and white bands are known to be at opposite edges of the image you can watch these isolated areas while adjusting individual black levels and input drives until both bands are just visible Images from this source will then display correct blacks and whites without crushing or washing out NOTE f using Input Peak Detector with PIP both images must have the same color space Input Level Detector The Input Level Detector check box enables specific thresholds for blacks and whites Input levels that fall below a specified level value see below are displayed as black and all others are displayed as white To use Enable Input Level Detector and display a continuous greyscale Set Level Detector Threshold to near black such as 200 1 2 3 Adjust Offsets to minimize area of black stripe 4 Set Level Detector Threshold to near white such as 800 5 Adjust Gains to minimize area of white stripe Level Detector Threshold The input level value defines the value to be used by the Input Level Detector in recognizing blacks and whites See Input Level Detector above Aspect Ratio Overlay Check this box to display an overlay pattern on the i
203. ion i s s s S SCSC A STE 3 32 Turn Off Image After min This sets the activation interval in minutes for Auto Shutdown If all activity input signals web or serial port activity key presses is lost for this length of time and Auto Shutdown is enabled an Auto Shutdown cycle will begin Enter Standby After min This sets the interval in minutes between starting Auto Shutdown and entering Standby mode Once Auto Shutdown has been entered and all activity continues to be absent for this interval the projector will automatically enter power Standby mode EM Stealth Mode Check this option to operate the projector with the status LED display on the EM module turned off The status LED is turned OFF during operation only In standby mode the status LED displays codes normally NOTE Option card LEDs on the EM remain visible Fan Assist Normal cooling uses temperature sensors to regulate fan speed Fan Assist enables full speed fan operation on the Light Module LM when operating in high ambient temperatures or for long periods This may help to reduce thermal problems and may prevent an emergency shutdown for thermal safety reasons Fan assist increases noise levels due to the simultaneous full speed operation of the fans Date amp Time Date amp Time The current year month day hour minute second Changes 1971 fF 09 M2 here reset the real time clock on the projector 03 3 51
204. ion is correct For almost all other signals backporch is correct Sync tip is needed only if the backporch is too small For many signals this control will have no effect Change this setting only if the image appears unusually dim has horizontal streaks or shows significant color drift D 18 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference CLP CLAMPING Cont d Value Range 0 sync tip 1 backporch 2 tri level SUBCODE INxy DESCRIPTION OF USE Set the black level clamping for Slot x Input y MAIN PIIP Set the black level clamping for main video Set the black level clamping for PIP video EXAMPLES CLP 0 Set the black level clamping for main video to sync tip CLP MAIN 0 Set the black level clamping for main video to sync tip CLP IN32 0 Set the black level clamping for Slot 3 Input 2 to sync tip CLR COLOR CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control adjusts the saturation amount of color in a video image SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the color saturation on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 0 1000 MAIN Set the color saturation on the main video to the specified value in the range 0 1000 PIIP Set the color saturation on the PIP video to the specified value in the range
205. ize or z A Filter 5 vertical stretch appears to the left of its slide bar icon adjustment window This number often expresses a percentage or it may have units associated with it such Figure 3 2 Slide Bar as pixels depending on the specific option Example Press LEFT RIGHT arrow key to gradually adjust the setting up or down both the number and the length of the bar change accordingly Hold for continuous adjustment Press ENTER to activate a slide bar text box for specific number entry via the keypad and then press ENTER to save or press EXIT to cancel Direct slide bars For quick access to Gamma Brightness and Contrast slide bars without traveling the menu system Press GAMMA BRIGHTNESS or CONTRAST to display the contrast slide bar Use the arrow keys to adjust a direct slide bar or press ENTER and enter a specific number from the keypad then ENTER or LEFT ARROW key or RIGHT arrow key to save or EXIT to cancel When you are done press EXIT to save and return to your presentation Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation 3 2 5 NOTES 1 You can still adjust a direct slide bar as usual if the display is turned OFF see OSD or Menu Preferences menu the slide bar won t be visible 2 A direct slide bar disappears if it is not used within five seconds Check boxes A conditions is present if its adjacent check box contains a ighlight E highl
206. jnduj oNg Bojeuy jx indu 104 suwi aIda pe9 ynduy IWAH UML La Bulpunolg 9 Joj9auuoy Z Bulpunosg g JoJoauUOD 9 z ndul 104 suu GIGA Z Bulpunolg y JOJ9auuoy G L indu 104 s6urwit GIGA L Bulpunolg JOJ9auuoy y pues nduj IAG AUN eng Bulpunolg z 10 23uu09 Bulpunolg 10 23uu09 z apow AUN Eng L apo sindu padno19 pues nduj IGS GH Iena pied jnduj 1aposag 0apiA L apo apo nqa 2 ena u jueunsn py G 8 1a u seopeoJg y dnoig DOT B LIY JOjo9 014 SIUL 0 SZIUOJYDU S Z apo DOVOJODAYBLE L 2914198 JOT BLIY Pa ZZp SU 194971 ss3994 ajoway JueLuobeue yy a 40109 pL LNO ZEZ SH 19497 ss3994 ajoway NI zez Sy 19497 ssaooy ajoway q9ulay 3 997 ssaooy ajoway 9A97 SS9IIY 3JOUISY NOS ESOUCWHd 10 0 JOJOB Y 0 SH Z a qeuz 10109 LL a qeu3 10109 ny OL A SHUM X SHUM A ang x ng A uaa X Uaalo APOy X Poy sBuiyes Arewig 10109 KNOY TOON 40 G p 952d 89S yu w beuen 10 09 Y juewjsnipy 10109 yNeyeq ZL SeS LL syu ag aul e9y Iv 319A OL sall4 2180 se q 6 synejeg Auojoe4 a 0 s9y 8 9597 SSSIIY SJOWIY 7 sue dyoeg aoejday 9 sBunes Arewlid 10109 usayed 359 aubuy 4f pjoysaly 10 99 8q 9497 10 99 9Q 19497 nding 10 99 8q 1ead indigo sonsoubelg pasueapy NODS BdIAIBS nuew Siu Jajua 0 puomssed SdIAIIS au salinbay A
207. k 01 Error on EM network LI 02 Error on PHM network 03 Error on ArrayLOC link Projector Head Module PHM Fan 01 PHM FD Fan 1 stalled FP 02 PHM FD Fan 2 stalled 03 PHM LMC Fan 1 stalled 04 PHM LMC Fan 2 stalled Electronic Module EM Fan FE 01 EM Fan 1 stalled 02 EM Fan 2 stalled Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 6 3 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting 6 4 Table 6 2 Error Codes Continued Projector Head Module PHMI Sensors SP SE CHAISTIE 01 PHM FD sensor 1 overtemp not connected 02 PHM FD Arr inlet overtemp or sensor not functioning 03 PHM QDPC board overtemp or sensor not functioning 04 PHM FD DMD overtemp or sensor not functioning 05 PHM QDPC board overtemp or sensor not functioning 06 LM Air inlet overtemp or sensor not functioning 07 LM Air exhaust overtemp or sensor not functioning 08 LM Power supply overtemp or sensor not functioning 09 LM LED Driver overtemp or sensor not functioning 10 LM ambient overtemp or sensor not functioning 11 LM Red thermistor overtemp or sensor not functioning 12 LM Green thermistor overtemp or sensor not functioning 13 LM Blue thermistor overtemp or sensor not functioning 01 EM Inlet 02 Panel Driver Temperature 03 Image Processor Temperature 04 Option Card 1 Temperature 05 Option Card 2 Temperature 06 Option Card 3 Temperature 07 Option Card 4 Temperature 01 EM PHM Firmware mismatch upgrade re
208. king mode for one of the transmitters on the THIC card 0 Default to select 12 bit per channel HDMI output 1 Compatible to select 8 bit per channel HDMI output 2 DVI only to select 8 bit per channel DVI output SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLxy Set transmitter working mode for THIC card EXAMPLES TTM SL11 0 Use 12 bit HDMI output for THIC on Slot 1 Input 1 TTM SL42 1 Use 8 bit HDMI output for THIC on Slot 4 Input 2 TTM SL11 2 Use 8 bit DVI output for THIC on Slot 1 Input 1 TTM SL12 Get the transmitter working mode for THIC on Slot 1 Input 2 TWP TARGET WHITE POINT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This command is used to set the ArrayLOC target white point Several preset white points are provided in addition to 4 user setting white points The control subcodes provide access to all the presets Due to the large number of sub codes they are not all listed Instead a simple substitution for the small x is made according to the following table 0 3200K 1 5000K D50 2 6500K D65 3 7500K D75 4 9300K D93 5 User 1 6 User 2 7 User 3 8 User 4 C Current D 70 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference TWP TARGET WHITE POINT Cont d TWP SLCT 5 Select User setting 1 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION
209. kmark wait for the six slide bar values to stabilize then delete the checkmark and exit The Auto Input Level is automatically turned off upon exit from the Input Levels Menu Black Levels and Input Drives IMPORTANT Do not use Input Levels to adjust color temperature This will distort contrast and brightness functions as well as color temperature NOTE f color temperature is set up based on the internal test patterns you can set up input levels for a given source so that they match the color temperature of the internal test patterns Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHK IS TIE Section 3 Operation To check your image levels and adjust these controls 1 Confirm that you are using an input on an Analog BNC card or a Dual Link DVI card Input Levels are not applicable for sources going through the decoder 1 Display a representative image for source you are setting up 2 Make sure that overall Contrast and Brightness settings are both set to near 50 3 Ifblack levels are too high or whites are too low which is rare you likely have a noisy source that is producing skewed input levels 4 To adjust levels automatically check to enable Auto Input Levels in the Input Levels menu Wait for all six Blacklevel and Input Drive values to stabilize Uncheck the Auto Input Levels option NOTE Do not use Auto Input Levels for dark images 5 Exit the Input Levels menu Exiting t
210. l be displayed at a time SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable or disable cascading EXAMPLES MCS Get the current state of this setting MCS 0 Disable cascading menus MCS 1 Enable cascading menus MDE SERIAL MODE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advance DESCRIPTION Set the mode for a serial communications port Settings such as bits parity and stop bits are grouped together into one selection SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE PRTA Set the mode on port A RS 232 In PRTB Set the mode on port B RS 232 Out PRTC Set the mode on port C RS 422 EXAMPLES MDE PRTA 0 Set mode on port A to 8 bit no parity 1 stop bit MDE PRTA 1 Set mode on port A to 7 bit even parity 1 stop bit MDE PRTA 2 Set mode on port A to 7 bit odd parity 1 stop bit MDE PRTA Get mode MDE PRTA 000 8N1 MFT MENU FONT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set the font size used by OSD SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt View Set Choose large font or small font as the font used by OSD EXAMPLES MFT Get current font option used by the OSD 0 is small font 1 is large font MFT 1 Use large font as the OSD font Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 41 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHKXISTIE
211. l respond to an input signal from that source A new channel can be created automatically or it can be copied from an existing channel and then edited as necessary See Copying a Channel on page 3 14 When you select a direct input SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3 or SLOT 4 any existing channels in the projector are searched for matching input and signal parameters this only occurs if Auto Source is enabled on these channels If no match to the incoming input signal is found in currently defined channels a new channel is temporarily created based on factory defined defaults for this type of signal The channel number assigned is the lowest available number from 01 99 NOTES 1 4n automatic channel will be discarded unless one or more of its parameters are changed and it will not appear in the channel list 2 If 2 channels have the same distinguishing source characteristics except for the reversal of sync connectors i e H sync and V sync are switched they are still defined as distinct channels 3 You cannot define a new channel without an incoming signal Using a Channel Current Channel You can normally select a channel from the Channel Setup list at any time by pressing Main Channel 03 TO CHANGE the CHANNEL key If you want to hide a 101 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz Enter 2 digit channel from appearing in this list you must eee deselect the In Menu option check box see 02 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz Move highlight and press E
212. lap I Blend option opens the second page of the Edge Blending submenu Proj 2 1 Proj 2 2 Proj 2 1 Proj 2 2 e Edge Blending Controls Figure 3 14 Edge Blending Concept Use Edge Blending controls to set the precise width shape and midpoint you need to blend overlapping edges together smoothly Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 41 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation i C s S S S SCSCC STE NOTE For information about advanced blending of complex configurations for example with spherical screens see the Twist User Manual P N 020 100143 xx included in the user kit Blend Width determines how much area is used for blending along an overlapping edge Slide bar values represent the number of pixels used for the blend For example A setting of eight creates a blended edge 8 pixels wide e A setting of 0 signifies no blending e For best results in most applications use a blend width of 12 25 for example with a screen size of 1920 x 1200 230 480 pixels WUXGA Ranges 0 960 horizontal 0 600 vertical SXGA Ranges 0 700 horizontal 0 525 vertical Show Blending Overlap turns your defined blend width area to solid grey so that if needed simply overlapping the grey bars can seamlessly align two adjacent images Toggle the Show Blending Overlap off to reactivate the blend effect Other Functions For convenience the Edge Blending submenu also inc
213. lect channel setup Laser Activate laser pointer at front of keypad Gamma Adjust mid range levels Number Keys e Enter a number such as channel value etc NOTE Can be set to select inputs if desired Help e Display context sensitive help toggle TOGGLE KEYS CHAISTIE Laser Pointer Status LED Activated when Laser pressed Shutter White black grey shows IR in regular light Auto Optimize image automatically Lens Functions Used and keys to adjust parameters OSD e Use to hide or show menus Press OSDW to turn Off Swap Swaps the Main and PIP image Exit Return to previous menu level or exits menus if at top level Enter Select a highlighted menu item change or accept a value Projector Select a projector in multi projector installations Bright e Adjust amount of light in image Contrast e Adjust difference between light dark Func Enter special code such as color enabling or enter fora negative numeric value 10 Enter 0 digit in a numeric field or add 10 to subsequent number for a menu selection of 10 or more Press and hold to toggle or press twice to toggle or press and release followed by AON or VOFF 3 2 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation 3 1 2 3 1 3 Wired Remote You can convert the standard IR remote
214. lications on your projector Gamma Settings Gamma Settings Detail Settings The system offers 2 types of gamma correction Gamma correction can be applied to a specific source to correct for luma encoding This is a channel setting and reapplied every time the same signal is detected This is the Gamma control On the other hand the system also provides a global Gamma Correction control The global control offers an offset applied to all channels This offset is used to compensate for changes in ambient conditions such as ambient light in the room and projected material Noise Reduction Settings Color Settings Standard 3 26 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHK IS TIE Section 3 Operation Gamma Correction Applies a global offset to all gamma settings for each channel It affects the shape of the curve by performing a linear transform toward a gamma curve of 1 0 while the control is increasing and likewise a linear transform toward a gamma of 3 0 as the control is decreasing The control should only be adjusted to compensate for ambient conditions To correct a particular source only use the Gamma control Gamma Select the base gamma table for a given source Select from one of 2 22 andard gt gt the standard tables a custom gamma function or select an 5 arbitrary
215. lization for usernames or passwords If capitalization is used for the username or password it will automatically convert it to lower case 2 Usernames can be a minimum of 4 and maximum of 32 characters Passwords can be a minimum of 4 and maximum of 128 characters Creating a User Name and Password 1 Click Add User to open the Add User window See Figure B 11 aad Uses User Name A Password 2 Type your username and password in the User name and Password fields respectively Re type Password MOI 3 Re type your password in the Re type Password field Cancel 4 Click Ok to save Figure B 11 Add User window Change Password 1 Select the user whose password you wish to change from the Password Chance Users window Password DEEN 1 Click Change Password to open the Password Change Re type Password window See Figure B 12 Cancel 2 Type the new password in the Password field Figure B 12 Password Change window 3 Re type the password in the Re type Password field 4 Click Ok to save or Cancel to ignore Delete User 1 Select the user that you wish to remove from the Users window See ERES Figure B 13 Are you sure you want to deleted the selected user 2 Click Delete User to open the Delete User window A confirmation TO WIR message appears 3 Click Yes or No to proceed or ignore the action Figure B 13 Delete User window Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual B 9 020 100367 05 Rev 1 0
216. ll keystone co ordinates to zero Brightness Uniformit 9 y Brightness Uniformity NOTE Brightness uniformity cannot be adjusted for images that SST Ss Oy have been warped using Main Menu gt Configuration gt Geometry Test Pattern of gt and Color gt Geometry Correction a L Brightness Uniformity provides further refinement of displays Top Left Corner 100 already matched for their primary colors and overall light output SiS 100 Use the Brightness Uniformity menu options for basic Bottom Laft Gomar Dali adjustments so that no area appears brighter than another In the Penkt idii bo Brightness Uniformity menu enable the Brightness dao pin Bottom Right Corner 100 Uniformity Enable check box to access a multitude of ett Cambr 100 adjustments for light output control in specific areas throughout Right Center 100 the image Your settings apply as long as the Brightness Overall Gain O 100 0 Uniformity Enable check box is enabled While making Full Screen Eye Motion Filter Eye Motion Filter O 70 Reset Brightness Uniformity Settings adjustments enable the Coarse Adjustment check box to apply Brightness Uniformity settings with a large granularity Coarse Adjustment helps to identify brightness changes and accelerates projector response time while adjusting settings To disable the Brightness Uniformity function delete the Brightness Uniformity Enable checkmark When used to refine screens already
217. ll tone of an image can be lightened or darkened without changing the two extremes and your images will be more vibrant yet with good detail in dark areas when using the Gamma control The nominal setting for Gamma Correction of 0 is correct for most signals and conditions If excess ambient light washes out the image and it becomes difficult or impossible to see details in dark areas increase the gamma correction setting to compensate Number Keys Press 1 to 9 to enter a value in a text box or to select a menu item 10 Press 0 zero before pressing another number to enter a number greater than 9 For example press 0 zero then 2 to enter the number 12 as a menu selection NOTE When entering numbers in a text field the 0 zero button only acts as zero See 3 2 5 Editing Text on page 3 9 Help Press HELP to display context sensitive help Press HELP again to close the Help window Menu Press MENU to enter or exit the projector s menu system OSD On screen display Press OSD and then the DOWN arrow to hide the projector s menu system during use To see the menus again do one of the following e Press and hold OSD for 2 seconds e Press and release OSD followed immediately by the UP arrow e Press OSD twice Invisible menus are fully functional enabling hidden access to numbered features and image adjustments by entering the corresponding sequence of key presses on the IR remote keypad NOTE With OSD ON
218. lope The valid range is 100 300 where 100 is 1 0 linear and 300 is a 3 00 power curve SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the base gamma curve for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the base gamma curve for main video PIIP Set the base gamma curve for PIP video EXAMPLES BGF 100 Set the base Gamma Function to 1 0 for main video BGF MAIN 300 Set the base Gamma Function to 3 0 for main video BGF IN32 222 Set the base Gamma Function to 2 22 for Slot 3 Input 2 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 11 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE BGS BASE GAMMA SLOPE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Defines the slope to be used for the base custom Gamma table in the small linear section at the bottom of the curve This slope can be used to bring the low level blacks in the image in or out This slope combined with the Gamma function defines the custom Gamma table The valid range is 50 200 where 50 is a slope of 0 5 and 200 is a slope of 2 00 SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the base gamma curve for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the base gamma curve for main video PIIP Set the base gamma curve for PIP video EXAMPLES BGS 100 Set the base gamma slope to 1 0 for main video BGS MAIN 200 Set the base gamma slope to 2 0 for main video BGS IN32 150 Set the base gamma slope to 1 5
219. lose to 60Hz for all sources This control must be set to locked if a 3D Stereo signal is used SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enables or Disables frame lock EXAMPLES FLE 0 Free Run output FLE 1 Enables frame lock FLE Get frame lock enabled status FLW SERIAL FLOW CONTROL CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Set the flow control for a serial communications port SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE PRTA Set the mode on port A RS 232 IN PRTB Set the mode on port B RS 232 OUT PRTC Set the mode on port C RS 422 EXAMPLES FLW PRTA 0 Set no flow control on port A FLW PRTA 1 Set flow control on port A to software FLW PRTA Get flow control FLW PRTA 001 Software FMD FILM MODE DETECT CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enable or disable film motion detection This is only available for interlaced or segmented frame sources Valid values are 0 Disabled 1 Auto 2 PsF SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the film mode detect for Slot x Input y D 28 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference FMD FILM MODE DETECT Cont d MAIN Set the film mode detect for Main video PIIP Set the film mode detect for PIP video EXAMPLE
220. ludes related options for enabling a test pattern Such functions duplicate those provided elsewhere in the menu system Advanced Edge Blending Controls IMPORTANT For most display wall installations see the Entero Installation Guide for information about matching edges in a display wall installation Software edge blending should not be required for these installations Advanced Edge Blending 1 Enable Advanced Curve Blend Shape determines the rate of roll off across the blend width i e how quickly the white levels across the blend change from light and dark Increasing the Blend Shape setting accelerates the rate of change at both extremes so that less of the region appears mid grey Decreasing the Blend Shape setting slows the rate of change so that more of the region appears mid grey For most applications this subtle control is best left close to 50 Blend Midpoint determines the white level at the blend midpoint the point equidistant between the beginning and end of the blend Increasing the Blend Midpoint setting creates a blend that appears brighter than the rest of the image Decreasing the Blend Midpoint setting creates a blend that is darker than the rest of the image A setting of 50 means the midpoint is approximately 50 black for best results in most applications keep fairly close to this default 10 Reset Advanced Edge Blending Settings 3 42 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05
221. mage The overlay shows the boxes corresponding to the size and shape of different aspect ratios Test Pattern Color Swap This function swaps the green and red color when drawing the Grid test pattern and may be helpful when adjusting convergence on the projector Freeze Image During Auto Setup If selected this will hide temporary image artifacts that may appear during the auto setup procedure Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 3 Operation Advanced Diagnostics This function allows the setting of advanced controls which may cause image disruption including the possible loss of the OSD menus These disruptions are only temporary pressing EXIT to exit the menu will restore the settings and allow normal operation Output Peak Detector This is an aid for setting up the input levels It causes the data to be processed so that very bright and very dark signals display as fully ON or OFF and everything in between is set to mid level gray The input levels should be adjusted so that bright and dark objects in the image are just visible Output Level Detector This is an aid for setting up the input levels It causes the data to be processed so that all levels below a specified value are set to black and all above and including it are set to white Level Detector Threshold Specifies the value to be used by the level detector Light Engine Test Pattern One of three light mo
222. main video NRD GENERAL NOISE REDUCTION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adaptive general noise reduction selects a filter sensitivity to noise A higher value may improve noisy sources although it will soften the image SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the noise reduction for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the noise reduction for main video PIIP Set the noise reduction for PIP video EXAMPLE NRD 32 Set the noise reduction to mid point for main video Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual D 45 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHKXISTIE NTR NETWORK ROUTING CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Set routing for ASCII messages SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Used to enable or disable daisy chaining 0 RS 232 RS 422 8 Ethernet communications are all separate from one another 1 RS 422 port s is are connected to the RS 232 network 2 The Ethernet port is connected to the RS 232 network 3 RS 232 RS 422 amp Ethernet are all connected to each other EXAMPLES NTR L List routing options NTR 0 Set routing so that each connection is routed separately NTR 3 Set routing to full daisy chaining OPP ODD PIXEL PHASE CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Add
223. may result that is outside the bandwidth limitations of the projector When attempting to apply the keystone settings a message will pop up on the OSD indicating that the bandwidth has been exceeded and Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE i Section 3 Operation the keystone cannot be applied The cursor co ordinates for keystone adjustment will remain at the failed keystone position This will allow the user to make minor changes and attempt to reapply the corner settings Either the co ordinates must be adjusted or the free run frequency must be changed to fall within the allowed bandwidth 2D Keystone Cursor Offsets 1 OffsetTop 0 2 Offset Bottom 0 3 OffsetLeft 0 4 Offset Right 0 The 2D Keystone Cursor Offsets menu allows the user to offset the 2D Keystone cursors from the edge of the image to allow manipulation of the keystone on overshot displays The FUNC HELP key combination will immediately disable the Keystone Brightness Uniformity Edge Blending and Black Level Blending features This is helpful when in some extreme keystone configurations some image corruption may appear and or the menus may not be readable Although FUNC HELP disables these features it will not overwrite their settings If keystone is simply enabled again the same image corruption may occur After pressing FUNC HELP it is recommend to immediately Reset Keystone Settings which will set a
224. ment Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt ArrayLOC Configuration A7 Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration Menu gt Configuration gt Service c11 Is the problem projector Color Saturation gt Select Color Adjustment set to Max Drives Is the problem projector Advanced Color Adjustment gt Color Mode set to Native Does clearing the very large PCA adjustments resolve the problem Does any projector have very large PCA adjustments to their primary colors Are there any projectors Is the Is the Common Gamut Target Gamut reasonably close to the correct Target Gamut 160 800 125 000 lt Target Flags ProjlD Group Int Age w 1 211 1 1 r wW 0 211 1 1 w 2 211 1 1 3 211 1 1 Do the mismatched projectors change brightness when another projector takes control of the array and changes the RGB Brightness Target z For Maximum with very different color Tarot ais HAS eel capabilities than the others Gamut should be close to the listed projector capabilities rather than the Target Gamut 313 329 313 Menu gt Status Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Color Saturation Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Advanced Color Adjustment Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt ArrayLOC Service Done Recalibrate the internal sensor of the problem Does cycling AC power to the SEDE
225. n automatically locate this channel when an incoming input signal matches If not checked the projector can locate the selected channel only when it is directly selected via CHANNEL on the keypad and a change in input signal will not result in a channel change LOCKED If checked all of the image settings for this channel are locked If unchecked default all available image settings can be adjusted as desired You cannot use Auto Setup with a locked channel PREVIOUS CHANNEL Select this option to see or change Channel Edit settings for the previous channel in the Channel Setup list Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 15 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation s s s W CA STE 3 4 3 4 1 3 16 e NEXT CHANNEL Select this option to see or change Channel Edit settings for the next channel in the Channel Setup list Adjusting the Image The most commonly used options for image adjustments are accessed through two menus Size and Position MENU then 1 and Image Settings MENU then 2 both of which appear in the Main menu You can change settings affecting the image from the current channel by working with the appropriate slide bars check boxes and drop down lists from either of these two menus EXIT returns to the previous menu or to the presentation 1f from the Main menu and accepts any changes you may have entered Settings are sa
226. nd Position MA dia 3 17 Cust m Sizing 8 2101 0 as 3 17 Resize Presets POPE PAE CO OO O 3 17 IO sastesnsssvcnsusssesnnsssevesseceseessoussodosecsenesosuaseatavapecesdnsssensdssecssansssduaseeescoossssedendseadesastedunssssonssscsssadsseausacats 3 18 Vertical SEVCtChsisscsscssscescsuscsscsccoessccsdscscsuseaacssseasscedsoesessesdasgesscesocosecstsescssoueoussetaecesubssssvosseasseesnetsaasens 3 18 Pixel Track A NN 3 19 AAA OS 3 19 H Position A AO 3 19 A E ni telalediancamaaaeanianens 3 19 Keep Aspect On AUTO Setup spain i 3 19 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHX IS TIE Table of Contents A N 3 20 3 4 3 Image Settings MEL o 3 21 Contrast assccccscetevcedasseesitandisccceetessesestsaceccdcesacedcensecoscsscsnacetscesdeiesuceeuscescseusssecoeassoassadsaddesuadsacsedseessuces 3 21 Brightness aene ear aaaea A 3 21 Color SACS si ii 3 21 Video OP O S ios andas 3 22 A E e 0 OOO R ARE O RRS 3 24 Advanced Image Settings lt cxcesaresidenesescnsuarcasverateneuseheeewnsapancesastaesvennteesusesasancer cxttavonaianstaueastacees 3 26 3 4 4 Configuration Adjusting System Parameters and Advanced ControlS ooooonoccnnncniocicinccnns 3 30 Language e AEAEE E A E E E A E E E E E 3 30 O tp t Options sin aio 3 30 Power M nageme t si iia 3 31 Date A AP ve a E Ea TE 3 32 Men Preferences zesoen n RTE A E V EN em 3 32 E EREET ERR EE OA E REE E RE R 3 34 Geometry amp COLOR ii ces 3 36 Whatis a Blend ANA
227. nding overlap When enabled this will make the size of the Edge Blending regions obvious This control should only be used during setup For information about advanced blending of complex configurations for example with spherical screens see the Twist User Manual P N 020 100143 xx included in the user kit What is a Blend In simple terms a blend appears as a gradient strip along an edge of a Blend projected image It is darkest along the extreme edge of the image and lightens nearer to the rest of the image Figure 3 13 e How Are Blends Used In multiple projector walls complementary blends between neighboring images can compensate for the extra brightness or intensity where these edges overlap By controlling blend width and other properties you can achieve uniformity across the group of images Visible overlaps disappear Figure 3 14 For best results use the same projector model and type throughout your display wall In addition avoid high gain screens whenever possible the optical performance of such screens demands minimal image offset thus projectors must be located very close to one another Figure 3 13 Edge Blending Edge blending software controls are located in With edge blending the two page Edge Blending submenu access Overlap Blend via the Configuration menu then go to the j Geometry and Color menu and select Edge Proj 1 1 Proj 1 2 Proj 1 1 Proj 1 2 Blending The Advanced Edge Blending Over
228. ne Press OK to apply changes or press Cancel to discard _ Adjust 2D Keystone changes Reset Keystone Settings 2D Keystone Cursor Offsets H Position 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 V Position After the Horizontal or Vertical adjustments have been made selecting Adjust 2D Keystone will retain these settings Fine adjustment can now be made by moving any single corner separately Geometry Correction 2 Test Pattern 3 Adjust Horizontal uta Adjust 2D Keystone 4 Adjust Vertical KeystondUse lt gt gt A Y gt to move menu cursor to a corner 5 Adjust 2D Keystone press lt ENTER gt to select the corner Reset Keystone Settings Select OK to apply changes or select Cancel to discard changes 2D Keystone Cursor Off H Position V Position Use the arrow keys to select the required corner NOTE The current corner is displayed in red Press ENTER to activate the corner adjustment NOTE The current corner is displayed in green Use the arrow keys to move the selected corner to match the screen Press ENTER again to save that position for the corner Repeat Steps 6 to 9 to adjust all 4 corners until they match the screen Select OK to apply the new corner positions to the image NOTE 4 message displays for approximately 10 seconds indicating that the projector is Processing request Under certain combinations of extreme keystone co ordinates and specific signal frequency a keystoned image
229. negative blanking but to run auto setup again ensuring that the content has active pixels on each edge of the image The maximum amount of top blanking allowed is half the image height minus 10 For negative blanking the image size can only be increased to the limit of the sync SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the top blanking for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the top blanking for the main image Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 65 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE TBL TOP BLANKING Cont d PIIP SECD Set the top blanking for the PIP secondary image EXAMPLES TBL 40 Set top blanking to 40 on main video TBL MAIN 40 Set top blanking to 40 on main video TBL PIP 40 Set top blanking to 40 on PIP video TBL IN32 40 Set top blanking to 40 on Slot 3 Input 2 TBL Returns the top blanking value on main video TBL PIIP Returns the top blanking value on PIP video TBL IN 127 Returns the top blanking value on Slot 1 Input 2 TCS TARGET COLOR SPACE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This command is used to set the ArrayLOC target gamut Several preset color spaces are provided in addition to four user setting gamuts The control subcodes provide access to all the presets Due to the large number of sub codes they are not all listed Instead a simple substitution fo
230. nputs select one to be used as the Primary or Main image Secondary Input From the list of active inputs select one to be used as the secondary or PIP Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 59 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i 3 60 Swap Main amp Secondary inputs Toggle the current secondary input s relationship so that the primary Main input becomes the secondary and the secondary input becomes the primary Swapping is available only when PIP or PBP is enabled NOTE There may be a slight delay when swapping the Primary and Secondary images PIP Enable Primary i Use this option to enabled a secondary image pea i through OFF displays the main input source only is a PICTURE IN PICTURE displays the 2 inputs at 98t on A p p a E Secondary once one image in a window in the other image Pn image jus PICTURE BY PICTURE displays 2 inputs at through PIP menu ene soy Sits Figure 3 18 Picture In Picture Short cut Press PIP on the IR remote to toggle between displaying 2 input sources at once main and secondary images or the primary or main input source only PIP Window Options Set the location of the PIP secondary image in the display You can adjust the following PIP Position Presets Set the location of the PIP secondary image in the display PIP Window Size Controls both the image width and height in tandem maintaining the current aspect ratio of th
231. nsensaceseanen esdatapceswncvareasoesntsntorcastinansarvacexens C 7 A E E E E E E EE C 7 C32 Control GrOUDS a ROA AO A ARS C 7 Co Access Laia C 8 D Serial Command Reference vi Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHRISTIE 1 1 1 2 Introduction Labels and Markings Observe and follow all warnings and instructions marked on the projector WN cidg Danger symbols indicate a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury AEN IDE Warning symbols indicate a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Yor Neale Caution symbols indicate a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury NOTICE Information provided with this heading alerts users to key points of interest not related to personal injury Safety Warnings and Guidelines Be aware of the caution label on the projector warning of possible eye hazard if the projected visible LED radiation light is viewed directly through certain optical instruments at close range Figure 1 1 indicates where the label is located The projector is a class 2M source of visible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm may pose an eye hazard NOTICE This projector must be operated in an environment that meets the ope
232. nter IN MENU on page 3 15 for that channel If you wish to access the channel press the CHANNEL key and enter its associated di de Signal Horizohtal TA number input ype Frequency Frequency NOTES 1 The current channel is Interlaced p Progressive highlighted in the channel list or if the current channel is hidden the first channel in the list is highlighted 2 Channels created automatically do not appear in the channel list unless a parameter for the channel was changed See Creating a New Channel on page 3 12 Channel Setup Menu All available channels are listed in the Channel Setup menu which describes how each channel can be accessed and provides access for editing copying and deleting channels Press MENU then 3 Channel Setup The Channel Setup menu appears The far left column lists channel numbers defined in sequential order unless you have deleted a channel Refer to Deleting a Channel on page 3 14 The values in the far right columns indicate e Horizontal and vertical frequencies or if there is a defined name for a channel appear here The H V frequencies will not appear if a name has been defined for the channel instead only the name is seen The H amp V frequencies are inserted as the name when the channel is first created The vertical frequency is displayed with the sync polarity The remaining columns pertain to each signal type such as input number slot location a variety of icons indicat
233. o to next Edit a character To edit a highlighted character use UP arrow key and DOWN arrow key to scroll through the alphabet numbers spaces and punctuation available When the character you need is highlighted press RIGHT arrow key to select it The cursor will move to the next available character of current text Change Case To convert a lower case letter to a capital letter position on the letter and press FUNC followed by the UP arrow key simultaneously To convert a capital letter into a lower case letter position on the letter and press FUNC followed by the DOWN arrow key Add or Delete a Character or Space To insert a space at the cursor location press FUNC then the RIGHT arrow key simultaneously To delete a highlighted character or space press FUNC then the LEFT arrow key simultaneously show2 show2 Press Press tuno lt to insert a space before to delete show 2 show Delete all Characters Press FUNC followed by ENTER Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 9 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation i C S S SCSCC A STE 3 3 3 3 1 3 10 Press ENTER When Finished To accept edits and leave the edit window press ENTER NOTE Press EXIT at any time to cancel changes and return to the previously defined text Edit numerical values Enter numbers directly from the keypad to speci
234. of 0 1000 EXAMPLES CLR 500 Set color saturation to 500 on Main video CLR MAIN 500 Set color saturation to 500 on Main video CLR PIP 250 Set color saturation to 250 on PIP video CLR IN32 100 Set color saturation to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 CLR Returns the current color saturation value on Main video CLR PIP Returns the current color saturation value on PIP video CLR IN 12 Returns the current color saturation value on Slot 1 Input 2 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 D 19 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE CNM CHANNEL INFO NUMBER CONTROL GROUP Channel SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control is used to edit the channel index number SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE COxx Select a new number for channel xx channel number from 01 to 99 EXAMPLE CNM C001 3 Change the channel number from 1 to 3 CON CONTRAST CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control sets the image contrast by adjusting the gain applied to the Input signal It has exactly the same effect as adjusting the Input levels except that it operates an all 3 colors and can be used to make quick adjustments For precise control the Input level adjustments should be used If the setting is too high bright portions of the image that are not quite at peak white are displayed
235. of another from stacked X 6X 5 Cyan projectors C66 D Magenta O 6X 7 White all colors NOTE Color enabling can also be implemented from numerous locations Figure 3 1 Function Key within the menu system Press FUNC followed by HELP to disable Keystone Edge Blending and Brightness Uniformity settings This will disable the features without changing the settings associated with them Proj Press PROJ to access a specific projector within a group of projectors or to confirm if the local projector is listening The number in the Enter Number window indicates which projector is currently listening to commands and will match the projector address defined in the Configuration gt Communications menu The Proj check box read only shows whether or not the projector physically connected to a remote is listening to commands from that remote A checkmark means that connected projector is listening if there is no checkmark you are communicating with a different projector To control a specific projector with the keypad press PROJ and then enter the 3 digit number assigned to the projector you want to use If you switch to a projector other than the one you are currently using the checkmark will disappear To broadcast to multiple projectors press PROJ and then PROJ again without entering a projector number Keypad commands will then affect all projectors present NOTE The projector address can be set in the Configuration gt
236. of rows of projectors to 2 TIL CTOT 2 Set the total number of columns of projectors to 2 TIL RVAL 2 Set the projector to be in the 2nd row TIL CVAL 1 Set the projector to be in the Ist column TMD TIME DATE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Admin DESCRIPTION Set the date time or time zone SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE DATE Set the date in the form yyyy mm dd TIME Set the local time in the form hh mm ss NOTE Some Currently time must be set using 24hr clock regardless of LOC TIME setting EXAMPLES TMD TIME 17 50 45 Set new local time TMD DATE 2007 02 30 Set the local date TMD TIME Get local time TMD TIME 17 50 45 D 68 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference TNT TINT CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Tint adjusts the balance of red to green in your image It is useful only for video images processed by decoder cards SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the tint level on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 45 deg to 45 deg MAIN Set the tint level on the main video to the specified value in the range 45 deg to 45 deg PIIP Set the tint level on the PIP video to the specified value in the range of 45 deg to 45 deg EXAMPLES TNT 40 Set tint le
237. oing back Table 3 3 Regions and Video Standards Summary STANDARD WHERE USED Subject to Change PAL Most of Europe China Australia some of S America some of Africa NTSC N America and Japan SECAM France Eastern Europe most of Africa NTSC 4 43 A tape only standard for partially translated hybrid signals PAL M Brazil PAL NC Argentina Chile other Latin American countries PAL 60 NOTE Generally use Auto for all instances except a poor quality input signal or a black and white video signal In order to detect and display such signals select the relevant standard from the list Input Video Black This control compensates for incoming elevated black levels present in certain video signals and ensures that blacks in the display are neither crushed i e where dark greys appear black nor excessively elevated 1 e where blacks appear dark grey By default the projector automatically determines the best setting according to the type of incoming video signal 0 IRE Used for DVD output with enhanced black SECAM most PAL standards and Japanese NTSC 7 5 IRE Used for most NTSC video signals If grays are black select _1 0 IRE If blacks are gray select 2 7 5 IRE 3 22 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation For some types of video you can override the setting The control is disabled for ot
238. ojector Power section contains an On and Off button Only one is enabled depending on the current powered state of the projector Shutter section contains an Open and Close button Only one is enabled depending on the current state of the projector s shutter OSD On Screen Display section contains an On and Off button Only one is enabled depending on the current state of the projector s on screen display Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix B Web UI B 2 Navigating the Web User Interface It is not recommended that you use the web browser s navigation functionality i e the Back and Forward functions as this will cause you to lose your web connection It is recommended that you navigate using the application interface and related functionality detailed in this section IMPORTANT Internet Explorer V6 0 and V9 0 has known performance issues and is not recommended to be used as the primary web browser for the web user interface It is recommended that you use Internet Explorer V7 0 or Firefox B 2 1 Help Text You can move your mouse pointer over most buttons or A e A On fields to display related help information See Figure Ba pau E To disable this feature click Admin gt System gt Tooltip Hide NOTE Help text is not available for a disabled 9958 09 buttons When working with the projector menu system on the Tools Figure B
239. onfig SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Advanced DESCRIPTION Control or monitor the state of the General Purpose Inputs and Outputs The strings have one character for each hardware connector pin and from left to right correspond to the pin numbers 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 Pin 1 is 12V and Pin 5 is Ground they cannot be read set or configured A low state or value of 0 will be read on an Input pin if the circuit attached to the pin is open A high state or value of 1 will be read on an Input pin if the circuit attached to the pin is shorted to ground This corresponds to a switch closing event SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE CNFG Set the Direction for the individual pins to Inputs or outputs STAT Get the state of all Inputs or set the state of all outputs EXAMPLES GIO STAT Get status of all the Inputs Returns GIO STAT 0000000 All Inputs are low GIO STAT 1x01000 Set status of the GPOs 2 high 3 no change 4 Low 6 High 7 Low 8 Low 9 Low GIO STAT hxxlxxx 500 Set status of the GPOs 2 Pulse high 6 Pulse Low Use interval of 500 ms for each GIO CNFG ITOOOIO Set pins 2 3 and 8 to Input 4 6 7 and 9 to Output Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 31 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE GMS VDIC GROUPED INPUTS MODE CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Allows users to select a mode
240. onize to This Projector Any projector in the array or BC group can be the master The last projector to be set as the master is the master for the array All or BC group Group This setting is not saved between session 6 6 3 Sensor Isn t Calibrated Yellow Alert Sensor calibration must be performed by Christie accredited service technicians Contact Customer Support 6 6 4 Invalid Target Gamut Yellow Alert A color setting is not valid for the current color space for example a white point is outside of the gamut 1 2 Access the Array Color Target menu Main gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target Check XY settings for the colors Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 6 7 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting CH IS TIE 6 6 5 Unable to Achieve Target Brightness Gamut Yellow Alert 6 8 A projector in an array that cannot achieve minimum brightness or target color space will disable BCLOC and cease contributing data to performance calculations e Try lowering the target brightness or target color gamut settings until all the projectors can achieve the same performance If the discrepancy is too big the light module may need to be replaced Call Customer Support Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHK 1S TIE i Section 6 Troubleshooting Tree 6 6 6 ArrayLOC Troubleshooting Tree Matching Projectors for Color and Brightness Tro
241. or Input describes the source signal and which input slot it is connected to Switching Inputs To select an input using the IR remote Press the INPUT key This will display a list of the four slots with the card type and input signal type in each slot The currently selected input for the main image will be highlighted Scroll up or down through the list and press ENTER to make a new selection Press the INPUT key again to show the list and allow the selection for the PIP image Repeatedly pressing the INPUT key will toggle between the main and PIP image Press the appropriate SLOT key 1 4 to quickly display one of the 4 Inputs connected to the projector for the Main image Press SLOT again to select a different Input This will not display any menu selection and is only applicable for the Main image Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE 3 3 2 To select an input using the menu system Section 3 Operation e Use the menu options Menu gt Secondary Input Switching gt Main Input and Menu gt Secondary Input amp Switching gt Secondary Input to select the source of the image for the main or secondary image Main Menu Secondary Input amp Switching 1 Main Input Dual Link DVI Input Card Slot 1 Input 2 2 Secondary Input Dual Link DVI Inpu PIP Enable Off PIP Window Options Secondary Size amp Position Secondary Image Settings Fade T
242. or each source SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the green drive on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 MAIN Set the green drive on the main video to the specified value in the range 255 to 255 PUP Set the green drive on the PIP video to the specified value in the range of 255 to 255 EXAMPLES GND 128 Set green drive to 128 on Main video GND MAIN 128 Set green drive to 128 on Main video GND PHP 100 Set green drive to 100 on PIP video GND IN32 100 Set green drive to 100 on Slot 3 Input 2 GND Returns the current green drive value on Main video GND PIIP Returns the current green drive value on PIP video GND IN 12 Returns the current green drive value on Slot 1 Input 2 GOG GREEN ODD PIXEL GAIN CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Adds an offset to Input green gain settings on the analog Input card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A to D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLx0 Set a green gain offset for the second A to D EXAMPLE GOG SL10 10 Set a green gain offset to 10 on Slot 1 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 33 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix
243. or space as a starting point select a source color space from the Copy Color Space From dropdown list When using Maximum as a starting point the values reflect a color space larger than capable for the best array color saturation The values may not reflect real world colors 3 Check both Auto Color Enable and Test Pattern Enable the system background color changes to the target color being adjusted for example Target Red x invokes a red background All other menu options change the system color to white as long as Test Pattern Enable is checked 4 Adjust the color primaries for example Target Red x and Target Red y for the color space To adjust white in the image select a User White item 1 to 4 e Adjust Target White x and Target White y values or e Check the Set White to Color Temperature box and set the White Color Temperature value to any value between 3200 and 9300 K 6 To adjust the target brightness for the array adjust RGB Brightness Target on the master projector For maximum brightness set the value to a large number such as 1000 7 Ifthe array appears matched across all projectors for color and brightness color setup is complete otherwise see Fine Tune Whites White Brightness or Primary Colors on page 3 57 NOTE Array Capability expresses the common gamut red green blue and white values of the current projector as a percentage of the array target color and brightness values see Minimum Gamut description
244. ot 4 Input 5 SIN PHP 21 Set picture in picture video to Slot 2 Input 1 SIN Get the current main video Input SIN 12 SIN MAIN Get the current main video Input SIN MAIN 12 SIN PIIP Get the current picture in picture PIP video Input SIN PIIP 21 SIZ SIZE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This controls how much the projector will electronically expand or shrink the image It will expand contract the image in both the vertical and horizontal directions so that the aspect ratio will not change 1000 is the neutral position where no resizing is done Scale value 1000 The horizontal scaling of the image is always to exactly this value but the vertical scale is also controlled by the VST control which stretches the image vertically When size is changed on PIP video nothing will visually happen It gets saved in the PIP s channel and will be applied the next time that channel is on main video SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Set the size for the main image EXAMPLES SIZ 500 Set size to 500 on main video SIZ Returns the size value on main video SMP SAMPLING MODE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control sets the color sampling mode for a digital signal to either YCbCr 4 4 4 RGB or YCbCr 4 2 2 Although the proper sampling mode is determined automatically
245. own ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control lets you select the Gamma table You can select from one of the standard tables or select an arbitrary Gamma table that has been downloaded into the projector A separate PC utility is needed to do this The 2 22 table is a simple power curve The standard table is a modified 2 22 curve with an optimized linear portion in the low end of the curve This is the same as selecting a custom table and setting the function to be 2 22 and the slope to be 1 0 Selecting Gamma Function from the drop down list enables the Gamma Function and Gamma Slope controls Valid values are 0 Standard 1 2 22 2 Gamma Function SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the base gamma curve for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the base gamma curve for main video PIIP Set the base gamma curve for PIP video EXAMPLES BGC 0 Set main video to the standard base gamma table BGC MAIN 0 Set main video to the standard base Gamma table BGC IN32 0 Set Slot 3 Input 2 to the standard base Gamma table BGF BASE GAMMA FUNCTION CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Defines the gamma power curve to be used when the Gamma table value is set to Gamma Function This value combined with Gamma Slope setting determines the Gamma table to be used The curve is generally a power curve with a small linear segment at the bottom defined by the s
246. oxes Check to enable message boxes that are directly triggered by user actions for example gamma or lens control message boxes Display Error Messages Choose how you want to be notified of errors detected in either the incoming signal or projector Select Screen or All default to see brief on screen messages This is recommended during setup or testing of the projector Or select Serial Ports to receive messages via RS 232 or RS 422 serial communication only To hide error message displays such as during shows and presentations select Off or Serial Ports Splash Screen Setup Choose when to display an introductory splash screen image such as a company logo graphic or message e Always Off A splash screen never appears Start up Only The splash screen logo appears at projector start up only e Start up And No Signal A splash screen appears at start up and at any time when there is no signal To add your own splash screen in addition to the default CHRISTIE logo splash screen use the Web UI to download the desired bitmap bmp file to the projector This will overwrite any other user splash screen that has been downloaded NOTE Only one user splash screen can be saved in the projector OSD Transparency Check this box if you want the OSD menu backgrounds to be transparent Menu Type Menu type is preset to Advanced which provides access to all projector functions Splash Screen Choose which splash screen i
247. p Use this control on the master projector to adjust the frame delay for the synched projectors in the ArrayLOC group Set the value equal to or higher than the reported Minimum Array Frame Delay value Setting the value lower than the reported minimum may result in tearing artifacts Minimum Array Frame Delay Indicates the largest minimum frame delay reported for the ArrayLOC group The value is the largest of the reported minimum frame delay required to render the display without tearing artifacts on each projector in the ArrayLOC group Synchronize RGB Brightness Use the Synchronized option to synch the RGB brightness for all the synched projectors in the ArrayLOC group Change this setting for each projector individually Synchronized is the default option RGB Brightness Target Use this option to adjust the target brightness for all projectors in this array RGB Brightness Use this option to adjust the brightness of the projector array as a percentage of the target brightness Managing Colors with ArrayLOC Entero projectors use ArrayLOC to display a reasonably saturated gamut at the maximum brightness that all the projectors in the array can support ArrayLOC monitors the projector array and adjusts settings automatically To manage color using ArrayLOC Take Control of the Array on page 3 56 Adjust Projected White and Primary Colors for the Array on page 3 56 e Fine Tune Whites White Brightness or Primary Colors on
248. p channel change errors or based on time Time can be absolute e g 12 00 00 on December 25 2008 or relative e g 5 hours and 30 minutes from now Special Function keys can also be used as a trigger An example would be pressing FUNC 1 on the remote Events can also be connected to external hardware triggers via the General Purpose IO port GPIO EVENTS Single Occurrence Events RTE T YYYY MM DD HH MM SS S description command Daily Occurring Event RTE T YYYY MM DD HH MM SS YYYY MM DD D R description command Where the first date and time is the start date and occurrence time The second date is the end date R is the Repeat Every interval i e repeat every R days Weekly Occurring Event RTE T YYYY MM DD HH MM SS YYYY MM DD W R D description command Where the first date and time is the start date and occurrence time The second date is the end date R is the Repeat Every interval i e repeat every R weeks D is the weekday or weekdays that the command should run on M Monday W Wednesday F Friday Su Sunday Tu Tuesday Th Thursday S Saturday LE MT will run on Monday and Tuesday TTh will run on Tuesday and Thursday MTWFSSu will run on Monday Tuesday Wednesday Friday Saturday and Sunday Monthly Occurring Event RTE T YYYY MM DD HH MM SS YYYY MM DD M R description command Where the first date and time is the start date and occurrence time The second date is the end date
249. pad enter the number corresponding to the function Reserved menu you wish to access such as 2 for the Image Settings menu Or use habeas T he UP DOWN arrow key on any keypad to highlight the desired option MA the arrow key on any keypad to highlight the desired option Go English then press ENTER The corresponding function menu or drop down list of MENTE Off El further options will appear With a function menu displayed enter a menu option number for any numbered option or use the UP DOWN arrow key to highlight the desired option and then press ENTER Long menus have a scroll bar on the right use the arrow keys to access the remainder of the menu Locked items or items that do not pertain to the current action or condition appear dimmed and cannot be selected When finished with a function menu e Press EXIT to return to the previous screen OR e Press MENU to leave the menu system and return to the presentation NOTES 1 f there is no signal present all source dependent adjustments are disabled 2 After 15 minutes of inactivity the projector exits the menus and returns to the presentation 3 The Status menu is read only Entero R PMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 7 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i 3 2 2 On line Help Press HELP to display summary information about the current menu or highlighted option Press HELP again to exit Main Menu Help l ET a EET a
250. page 3 57 Fine tune Projector Colors With a Color Meter on page 3 58 NOTE ArrayLOC is enabled by default Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 55 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation O CHKISTIE 3 56 Take Control of the Array Configuration To make color adjustments across the array you must make ArrayLOC the you are working with the master projector RES 1 On the projector you want to work with access the ArrayLOC menu Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC 2 Check Synchronize to This Projector 6 Projector Color Adjustment Bright ColorLOC Configuration Array Color Target ArrayLOC Status The current projector becomes the master projector Changes you make in the Array Color Target or ArrayLOC Configuration menus on the master projector are broadcast to the other projectors in the array ArrayLOC Configuration Adjust Projected White and Primary Colors for the Array User defined target color spaces allow color primaries and white points to be adjusted independently For example you can select the target color space User 1 copy the values from the target color space Factory leave the color primaries and adjust only the white point All the settings for a user defined color space are editable 1 Navigate to Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target 2 In Target Color Space select one of the User settings to modify NOTE 7o use another col
251. peration submenu Select Delete Channel and press ENTER a window will appear to confirm the deletion of this channel Channel Setup an 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz i i 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz Select Channel Operation 1 2 p5W 63 98kHz p60 02Hz Edit Channel 63 98kHz p60 02Hz Copy Channel Delete Channel Delete Unlocked Only Delete All Channels To Delete Multiple Channels Highlight any channel in the Channel Setup menu and press ENTER to go to the Select Channel Operation submenu Select Delete Unlocked Only and press ENTER to delete all unlocked channels Select Delete All Channels to delete all channels even those that are locked In either case the current channel will remain but will be redefined from projector defaults NOTE For any deletion a window will appear to confirm the deletion of the desired channel Select Cancel default if you don t want to delete Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 3 Operation Editing a Channel 1 Press MENU from the presentation level to display the Channel Edit 04 Main menu To display the Channel Setup menu i Card Type Dual Link DVI Input Card press 3 or move the highlight to the Channel Setup HFrequency 63 98 kHz option and press ENTER The Channel Setup menu will V Frequency 60 02 Hz appear Interlaced No 2 To edit parameters shown in the Channel Setup menu Sync Source Separate H V selec
252. pport set to appropriate levels AR No Yes Feedback Sensor Uncalibrated Yes Min Brightness Not Met Has the ArrayLOC been ON for at least 2 minutes Yes Min Gamut Not Met Proceed to Fine Tuning of Projected Colors Managing Copy PCAs from Colors with ArrayLOC tuned C12 in Section 3 Target Color Space Projector Color Adjustments PCAs are specific to each Target Color Space so when the selected Target No A3 No Color Space is changed the adjustments from a A2 previously tuned color space should be copied as a baseline for the adjustments in the new color space and if Has the array Paty ties eee Is the problem necessary projector tuning repeated 5 been tuned YES Color Space match the YES pin me PTY c1 PCAs from the tuning coor A5 Does the Status page on No missing projector s show any BCLOC GD pe mM AL Are the missing projectors correctly wired to the Does the array projector count ArrayLOC network No equal the expected number of Bright ColorLOC Array Status projectors No Yes 4 Target Gamut 800 330 160 800 125 000 313 329 A11 A12 lt Target Common Gamut 687 306 193 738 150 34 Is the ArrayLOC Network Yes Are the missing projector s Flags ProjlD Group Int Age Rx Ry RY Gx Gy GY Bx By BY on missing projector s set to the set to the correct BCLOC Mode N m t network a a RANAS Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt ArrayBCLOC Yes No we 211
253. put signal is looped to Outputl and the Input2 signal is looped to Output2 e Choose Main Secondary Loop to loop the main amp Secondary video to the outputs regardless of which card these signals originate from The main video signal is looped to Outputl and the secondary video signal is looped to Output2 Power Management Configuration Power Management Reserved Auto Power Up Ou Auto Shutdown Enable Turn Off Image After min BH 5 Enter Standby After min B 10 EM Stealth Mode On Fan Assist On Auto Power Up If there is an AC power interruption while Auto Power Up is enabled the projector will resume operation in the same state as it left off If the light engine is ON and an image is showing when AC power is lost the projector automatically powers back up with the light engine ON and an image will show when AC is restored Auto Shutdown Enable When AUTO SHUTDOWN Mode has been selected and no projector activity has been seen for the activation time out period the projector will enter a power saving mode in which the light engine dims and the shutter closes If this condition persists for an additional time out period the projector automatically goes into STANDBY mode The presence of any activity within this combined interval will cancel Auto Shutdown and will return the projector to normal operation Entero R PMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 31 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operat
254. quired 02 Image processor card is missing or not seated correctly Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHK ISTIE Section 6 Troubleshooting 6 3 Power 6 3 1 Projector Does Not Power ON 1 2 Ensure that the projector is plugged in Ensure that cables are connected and not damaged 6 4 Light Module 6 4 1 Light Module Suddenly Goes OFF 1 Check the shutter setting if status display shows SH then the shutter may be active Toggle through shutter modes In gray shutter mode it should be possible to display menus Verify that the RGB Brightness is set sufficiently higher than 0 to ensure a visible image The DMDs may be overheated Check for an alarm condition 6 5 Displays 6 5 1 The Projector Is ON but There Is No Display ew NM oP Mi Make sure the lens cover is removed from the lens Make sure the correct display button is selected in the channel setups Make sure AC power is connected Is an active source connected properly Check the cable connections and make sure that the alternative source is selected Make sure that the DVI cable from the PHM to the EM is connected Are the test patterns accessible If so check source connections again 6 5 2 The Display Is Jittery or Unstable 1 If the non cinema display is jittery or blinking erratically make sure that the source is properly connected and of adequate quality for detection With a poor quality o
255. quired in the DTT control is reached SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the detail for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the detail for Main video PIIP Set the detail for PIP video EXAMPLE DTL 50 Set the detail to mid point for Main video DTO DETAIL OVERSHOOT CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Detail overshoot undershoot control is provided to minimize ringing on the enhanced edges detail and texture effects SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the detail overshoot for Slot x Input y MAIN Set the detail overshoot for Main video PIIP Set the detail overshoot for PIP video EXAMPLE DTO 50 Set the detail overshoot to mid point for Main video DTT DETAIL THRESHOLD CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Detail threshold selects a filter sensitivity to noise A higher value may improve noisy sources especially for higher settings of detail This control sets the minimum change required before the detail DTL function is activated This allows images to be sharpened without increasing the background noise SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the detail threshold for Slot x Input y Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 23 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE DTT DETAIL THRESHOLD Cont d MAIN Se
256. r Color Adjustment Configuration ArrayLOC Bright ColorLOC Configuration Array Color Target ArrayLOC Status NOTE While working in the ArrayLOC menus and submenus ArrayLOC displays a warning popup on the ArrayLOC Configuration affected projector if adjusted settings fall outside the range the system can adjust for Warnings include e Minimum brightness not met BCLOC disabled e Minimum brightness not met Warning e Min Gamut not met BCLOC disabled Min Gamut not met Warning Synchronize to this Projector To broadcast the ArrayLOC settings to the projectors in your array you must define a projector as the master by checking the option Main Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Synchronize to This Projector The master projector has access to most settings under the Bright ColorLOC Configuration and Array Color Target submenus These settings are greyed out on the other projectors in the array to prevent conflicting information from being sent to the array You can change which projector is the master at any time by checking the Synchronize to This Projector option on another projector The previous master projector automatically releases the setting Bright ColorLOC Configuration Use the Bright ColorLOC Configuration menu to assess and ArrayLOC work with the capabilities of the projectors in the group or BrightColor_OC Configuration array NOS Minimum Gamut o e Minimum Brightness P
257. r improperly connected source the projector repeatedly tries to display an image however briefly The horizontal or vertical scan frequency of the input signal may be out of range for the projector The sync signal may be inadequate Correct the source problem 6 5 3 The Display Is Faint ai eae a The source may be double terminated Make sure that the source is terminated only once The source if non video may need sync tip clamping Check RGB Brightness setting and Brightness Uniformity control If the Twist software was used test by disabling the blend Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 6 5 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting CH IS TIE 6 5 4 The Upper Portion of the Display Is Waving Tearing or Jittering 1 This can occur with video or VCR sources Check your source 2 Check that the RGB Brightness setting is not unexpectedly low 6 5 5 Portions of the Display Are Cut OFF or Warped to the Opposite Edge Resizing may need adjustment Adjust until the entire image is visible and centered 6 5 6 Display Appears Compressed Vertically Stretched 1 The frequency of the pixel sampling clock is incorrect for the current source 2 Sizing and positioning options may be adjusted poorly for the incoming source signal 3 Check the geometry correction for warp or keystone correction 6 5 7 Data is Cropped from Edges 1 To display the missing material reduce image size to fill the display are
258. r the small x is made according to the following table M Max drives read only EBU read only SD Video read only HD Video read only 2 mm ml wm Factory read only l User 1 2 User 2 3 User 3 4 User 4 C Alias to selected table SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Selects the color space preset 0 Max drives M 4 Factory F 1 EBU E 5 User 1 1 2 SD Video S 6 User 2 2 3 HD Video H 7 User 3 3 8 User 4 4 RDxX Adjusts the x coordinate of the red color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places D 66 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference TCS TARGET COLOR SPACE Cont a RDxY Adjusts the y coordinate of the red color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places GNxX Adjusts the x coordinate of the green color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places GNxY Adjusts the y coordinate of the green color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places BLxX Adjusts the x coordinate of the blue color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places BLxY Adjusts the y coordinate of the blue color point 0 800 with 3 decimal places COPY Copy gamut settings from preset to current Value 0 8 for source preset CCAP Read only field which returns string that gives relationship between projector capability and the color target EXAMPLES TCS SLCT 1 Sele
259. rating range specification as listed in Section 7 2 7 Environment Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 1 1 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE Section 1 Introduction 1 3 Purchase Record and Service Contacts Whether the projector is under warranty or the warranty has expired Christie s highly trained and extensive factory and dealer service network is always available to quickly diagnose and correct projector malfunctions Complete service manuals and updates are available for all projectors If a problem is encountered with any part of the projector contact your dealer Usually servicing is performed on site If you have purchased the projector fill out the information below and keep with your records Table 1 1 Purchase Record Dealer Dealer or Christie Sales Service Contact Phone Number Projector Serial Number Purchase Date Installation Date The serial number can be found on the license label located on the back of the projector Table 1 2 Ethernet Settings Default Gateway DNS Server Projector IP Address Subnet Mask 1 4 Projector Overview The Entero R PMWU RPMSP LEDO1 projectors are professional quality WUXGA and SXGA data projectors featuring the latest in DLP display technology to achieve high brightness high resolution multimedia and video projection images Projectors use Christie s exclusive KoRE electronics and firmware to a
260. rayLOC Service Proceed to Fine Tuning of Projected Colors Managing Colors with ArrayLOC in Section 3 Proceed to Take Control of the Array Set the Array Color Target Managing Colors with ArrayLOC in Section 3 The unit of the RGB Brightness Target value can be set using the PCA White Brightness Adjustment See Setting the RGB Brightness Target Unit Unless the array is being deliberately dimmed the RGB Brightness NOT the RGB Brightness Target should be set to 100 Check lens for dust dirt Check screen gain 6 10 Entero R PMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHAISTIE 6 6 8 ArrayLOC Troubleshooting Tree Continued Array Color Setup Troubleshooting ArrayLOC START HERE Menu Reference Go to the Main gt Configuration 4 gt ArrayLOC 13 gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration 3 menu Select the Array Status menu item to display the Bright ColorLOC Array Status Do the colors and brightness of the array projectors match A8 Are the array colors red green blue white the expected colors Proceed to Take Control of the Array Set the Array Color Target Managing Colors with ArrayLOC in Section 3 Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 C7 C8 C9 EDCA Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Projector Color Adjust
261. recetved otherwise the message is discarded NOTES 1 h indicates a hex number 2 Ifa request message has a checksum so will the reply 3 If using both acknowledge and checksum either character can occur first Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual C 5 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Appendix C Serial Command Overview CH IS TIE C 2 5 Accessing Specific Channels or Inputs For several commands for example ASR Auto Channel Select you can direct the message to particular channel input or image To do this include a subcode after the function code Example ASR 1 Enable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by the Main image ASR MAIN 1 Enable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by the Main image ASR PIIP 1 Enable Auto Channel Select for the channel being used by the PIP image ASR C003 1 Enable Auto Channel Select for channel 3 BBL IN 12 30 Set the bottom blanking value on slot 1 input 2 to value 30 It is only possible to set parameters from a specific channel or input if that parameter is stored separately for each channel or input This function cannot be used for parameters that are specified for the projector as a whole such as projector address The serial commands listed in the document specify which subcodes are applicable to each function C 2 6 Flow Control Normally messages can be sent to the projector before processing of earlier messages is complete the p
262. rectly after the Function code For Set type messages sent to the projector neither of these characters appear Data directly follows the code and subcode Other Special Functions Optional To add functionality to the current message include one or more of the following special characters between the Function code Subcode and the first parameter If more than one add them in any order See C 2 6 Flow Control Cc Control Class Inquiry D Default value Text E Enable Control Inquiry G Access Group Inquiry H Return the Help text for a control L Return a list of options for list controls M Find min max adjustments i e range N Return the name of the control T Return the type of control i e Slidebar etc Data The value for a given projector state such as ON or OFF appears in ASCII decimal format directly after the request reply symbol You can add an optional space after the symbol i e before the data in a set message but data in replies follow the exclamation symbol without a space Other details to remember about data All values returned by the projector reply messages have a fixed length regardless of the actual value For a specific parameter the length will always be the same e g contrast is always returned as 3 characters projector number is always returned as 5 characters The minimum parameter size is 3 characters Values that are less than the pre de
263. rocessed by decoder cards SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE INxy Set the luma delay on Slot x Input y to the specified value in the range of 3 pixel to 3 pixel MAIN Set the luma delay on the main video to the specified value in the range 3 pixel to 3 pixel PIIP Set the luma delay on the PIP video to the specified value in the range of 3 pixel to 3 pixel EXAMPLES CRM 3 Set luma delay to 3 pixel on Main video CRM MAIN 3 Set luma delay to 3 pixel on Main video CRM PIP 3 Set luma delay to 3 pixel on PIP video CRM IN32 3 Set luma delay to 3 pixel on Slot 3 Input 2 CRM Returns the current luma delay on Main video CRM PIP Returns the current luma delay on PIP video CRM IN 12 Returns the current luma delay on Slot 1 Input 2 CSP COLOR SPACE CONTROL GROUP Input SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control specifies which color space the Input signal uses This determines how the color components are decoded for accurate color in the display Color space control only applies to analog Input signals Although the proper color space is normally determined automatically by the projector you can override the setting Use RGB unless you are using component video Use YPbPr SDTV for most video sources Use YPbPr HDTV for high definition signals NOTE When certain RGB signals are first connected the projector may not initially recognize t
264. rojector Capability R106 9 G113 6 Use this option to set the minimum brightness as a di percentage of the target brightness that the array will target and to set the threshold for alerts from projectors that cannot achieve the specified minimum Projectors that fall below the minimum are excluded from the calculations of the common gamut and common brightness If the projector falls below the minimum the projector operates at its current brightness and gamut Changes will not be made Minimum Gamut Use this option to set the minimum gamut as a percentage of the target gamut that the array will display and to set the threshold for alerts from projectors that cannot achieve the specified minimum Projectors Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH 1S TIE Section 3 Operation that fall below the minimum are excluded from the calculations of the common gamut and common brightness If the projector is unable to maintain the minimum gamut the projector operates at the current brightness and color gamut LED drive level changes and electronic color correction is not done NOTE The failure point for maintaining minimum gamut is calculated as Target Green Primary lt minimum gamut For example see the diagram at the right where b is the length of the line from the target white point to the target color primary and a is the length of the line from the target white point to
265. rojector will just store messages in a buffer until ready to process However if a series of messages is sent it is possible that the projector may not be able to process them as fast as they arrive and the buffer will become full If this happens the projector will send the 13h Xoff code to instruct the controller or any devices preparing to transmit to cease transmission At this point the controller must respond immediately and send no more than 10 extra characters or they may be lost i e the projector is able to accommodate the receipt of up to 10 more bytes after it sends 13h Xoff When the buffer is once again available the projector will send a 11h Xon command to resume transmission NOTE Xon and Xoff controls apply to both directions of communication The projector will not send more than 3 characters after it has received a 13h Xoff code C 2 7 Network Operation C 6 Up to 1000 projectors can be linked together in a chain with the OUT port on one connected to the IN port on the next A controller connected to the IN port on the first projector can control them all either by broadcasting messages which have no address and are thus seen by all projectors or by directing messages to specific projector addresses To work with a specific projector in a group the projectors must first be assigned a unique I D either a projector number or an Ethernet IP address Insert the number of the target projector bet
266. rrayLOC is OFF or set to Fixed mode When ArrayLOC is set to Cool or Bright mode LED levels are controlled by ArrayLOC function automatically Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target tells the projector what you expect to see on the screen This is the recommended way to control the color space for the projector and array See Array Color Target on page 3 43 This menu is also available under Configuration gt Geometry amp Color Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Projector Color Adjustment lets you adjust each projector output so that it represents the color target Adjustments compensate for projector to projector differences and for the projection system as a whole including loss of brightness or color shift due to lens mirror and screen For example the mirror might not reflect blue 100 percent or the screen might absorb more blue You can measure the output at the screen with a color meter and use this option to increase the blue until you get the array color target value at the screen See Projector Color Adjustment on page 3 43 This menu is also available under Configuration gt Geometry amp Color Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Projector Color Adjustment gt White Brightness Adjustment lets you turn the brightness target adjustment into a meaningful number for example a number that relates to Ft L Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 2 5 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 2 Setting Up a Source CH 1S TIE
267. s an offset to the pixel phase setting on this card It is used to compensate for differences between the A to D converter used to sample even pixels and the one used for odd pixels A value of 0 is the null position in which both A and D converters are set to exactly the same value SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLx0 Set a pixel phase offset for the second A to D EXAMPLES OPP SL10 1 Set a pixel phase offset to 1 on Slot 1 OSD ON SCREEN DISPLAY CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Display or Hide the OSD screen SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Turn ON OFF OSD display EXAMPLES OSD Get current state of OSD 0 when OSD is hidden 1 when OSD is displayed OSD 0 Turn OFF OSD display The OSD will run in the background even though it is not visible D 46 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference OST OSD TRANSPARENCY CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enable or Disable on screen display transparency SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable Disable OSD transparency EXAMPLE OST 1 Enable OSD transparency PBC PIP BORDER COLOR CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control lets you c
268. s to be used the default or user downloaded splash screen Cascading Menus Enable or disable cascading menus When disabled a single menu level is displayed on the OSD at a time Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 33 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation CH IS TIE i 3 34 Communications Communications Serial RS 232 IN Options Serial RS 232 OUT Options Serial RS 422 Options Projector Address 00 Network Routing Separate y Ethernet Settings Broadcast Keys o Front IR Enabled v Defines and controls how single or multiple projectors are linked with each other and to a controlling device For detailed information see C Introduction on page C 1 Serial Options NOTE The Synchronize Keys Test Pattern Color Enable option lets you use the ArrayLOC network to forward IR remote keys from the master projector to all the synched projectors in the ArrayLOC group See Synchronize Keys Test Pattern Color Enable on page 3 54 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Wired Keypad Enabled v Baud Rate Determines the speed of communication to and from the projector on the RS 232 or RS 422 links The maximum rate for the RS 232 is 115200 for RS 422 it is 19200 Set the baud rate to match that of your controlling device such as your PC Refer to the documentation for the controlling device to determine the baud rate In an existing network of projectors if you disco
269. shipment in either direction b Projector lamps See Christie s separate lamp program policy c Damage caused by use of a projector lamp beyond the recommended lamp life or use of a lamp supplied by a supplier other than Christie d Problems caused by combination of the product with non Christie equipment such as distribution systems cameras video tape recorders etc or use of the product with any non Christie interface device e Damage caused by misuse improper power source accident fire flood lightening earthquake or other natural disaster f Damage caused by improper installation alignment or by product modification if by other than a Christie authorized repair service provider g For LCD projectors the warranty period specified applies only where the LCD projector is in normal use Normal use means the LCD projector is not used more than 8 hours a day 5 days a week For any LCD projector where normal use is exceeded warranty coverage under this warranty terminates after 6000 hours of operation h Failure due to normal wear and tear PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE Preventative maintenance is an important part of the continued and proper operation of your product Please see the Maintenance section for specific maintenance items as they relate to your product Failure to perform maintenance as required and in accordance with the maintenance schedule specified by Christie will void the warranty CHX IS TIE
270. ssociated window showing related information and input fields To return to the previous menu click the menu title bar see Figure B 7 To return to a previous menu click on the current menu s title bar or press ESC NOTE Click the Maximize button to view the full screen size Various types of menu elements Figure B 8 and Figure B 9 allow you to define projector settings These include Field entries Drop down lists e Check boxes Sliders Resize Presets Main Menu Size amp Position Default 4 Size 0 00 Vertical Stretch 1000 0 200 2200 _H Position V Position Keep Aspect On Auto Setup W Blanking Figure B 7 View Previous Menu IMPORTANT When a menu option is modified through the Virtual OSD menu the projector setting takes effect immediately Entering a number in a numeric field 1 Position your mouse pointer within the numeric field that you wish to edit 2 Click to highlight the field entry NOTE f you click the menu option the field cannot be edited 3 Edit the field entry Entero R PMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Appendix B Web UI CHAISTIE 4 Press Enter to save your changes Output Options 0 000 59 94 4 Menu option selected 0 000 l _ Numeric field selected Figure B 8 Select Numeric Field Selecting an option from a drop down list 1 Click the option drop down
271. st Pattern Off v Adjust Horizontal Keystone Adjust Vertical Keystone Adjust 2D Keystone Reset Keystone Settings 2D Keystone Cursor Offsets H Position 3 Perform coarse keystone adjustment by using the Adjust Horizontal Keystone or Adjust Vertical Keystone setting Use the left and right arrow keys to make the adjustment NOTE Adjust Vertical Keystone and Adjust Horizontal Keystone settings are exclusive For example if you make a vertical keystone adjustment and then make a horizontal keystone adjustment the horizontal adjustment clears the vertical setting 1 2 E 5 6 7 8 9 V Position Entero R PMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 37 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation 3 38 S 12 CHAISTIE NOTE The corner cursors are a guide as to how the image will be adjusted The outside edge of a cursor will be the outside edge of the image It may not be possible to exactly match the screen dimensions with the Horizontal and Vertical Keystone controls but these settings can be refined when the 2D keystone settings are adjusted When adjustment of the corners is complete select OK NOTE 4 message displays indicating that the projector is Processing request The settings are applied to the displayed image and will take approximately 10 seconds Geometry Correction Test Pattern Off Adjust Horizontal Keystone AdjustHorizontal Keystone Adjust Vertical Keysto
272. t See input levels overview 1 3 P PBP Picture by Picture 3 59 PCA see projector color adjustment PHM Network 3 54 Picture by Picture PBP 3 59 Picture in Picture PIP 3 59 PIP PIP Picture in Picture 3 59 PIP Border Color 3 60 PIP Border Width 3 60 PIP enable 3 60 PIP H Position 3 60 Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Index PIP key remote keypad 3 4 PIP Position Presets 3 60 PIP V Position 3 60 PIP Window Options 3 60 PIP Window Size 3 60 Pixel Phase 3 19 Pixel Track 3 19 Port number entering 3 35 position See Size and Position menu Power key remote keypad 3 3 Power Management menu 3 31 power precautions 2 1 power projector OFF 2 1 power projector ON 2 1 precautions See safety preferences See Menu Preferences preset sizes images 3 17 to 3 18 Preventative maintenance 5 3 Proj Projector key remote keypad 3 6 Proj ID array 3 53 Projection Head Module PHM overview 1 3 Projector assigning changing number 3 34 location precautions 5 2 projector features 1 4 power OFF 2 1 power ON 2 1 Projector Address 3 34 Projector Capability 3 49 Projector Color Adjustment 3 51 projector color adjustment 3 57 projector components 1 4 projector configuration 3 30 projector menu See menu navigation projector overview 1 2 Electronics Module EM 1 3 projection head module 1 3 R rear projection image orientation 3 30 r
273. t signal timing by a fraction of a frame and up to several frames The control is only available when the input signal is frame locked When setting up a projector array or projector tiling all projectors should be set to the highest minimum frame delay for the array In free run mode or in cases where the signal cannot be frame locked the minimum latency reported in Actual Frame Delay is applied to the signal 3 30 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE i Section 3 Operation NOTE Frame locking on projectors in a ArrayLOC network can be controlled from one projector See Synchronize Frame Delay on page 3 55 When Synchronize Frame Delay is used the master projector sets the frame delay for the synched projectors in the array Actual Frame Delay ilndicates the dynamically calculated effective minimum frame delay for the projector The calculated delay is affected by image shift scaling warp keystone applied and format For example the minimum latency can vary based on the amount of scaling applied to the image When using keystone or warping an additional latency is required depending on the amount of warp Free Run Frequency This control sets the output video vertical frequency when Frame Locking is set to Free Run HDMI Output Loop Source The HDMI output options are e Choose Direct Loop to directly pass through the HDMI input signals from the same Twin HDMI input card The In
274. t the check box to allow an incoming signal to be passed to the Output ports of the HDMI Input module when the unit is in STANDBY mode Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHXISTIE 4 Menu Tree Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 4 1 Menu Tree Section 4 CHAISTIE MENU TREE 4 1 juausn py 10 09 joajas sBunjas 10109 lepuodas ainyesadwia JOjOD Z Jay4 UOHOA 9 3 USaJOS IN4 G uononpey SSION OJNDSON E LOHONP9Y Pepy 40019 Z sBulyos UOHINPayY ASION did 19114 UOHON 9 3 9 uononpey ISION juaweoueyuy INXA s6ulyas 1ejag lepuodas JOOUSIBAO 819 ploysay 12190 NODS He 9q sBunjasg ewweg Aiepuosag ado s ewweg uojoun4 ewweg ewweg UOI 99IOD ewweg NODS yuelg JUBIy y quelg ya7 e yuejg WOyog Z yuejg dol MOpUI du aapoy Sunyue g Aepuos s JauUeYD xX N 9uueyy snolnald pax9o7 pases ny nu W ul indu OIS jeuueyo wey 391nog Su s paoejajul fouanbalW A Aouanba14 H adh piep TKNOMOTNOOR DD sBunjes 10 09 lepuoas y sBunjes uojonpey ASION JEPUODaS E sBumas reyeg lepuodas Z sBunjos ewweg lepuosas sBulyjes a6eu pasuerpy giqeuz 10 09 LL 40 99 9q eed indu OL uojeso7 dwerg 3 qeu3 10109 omy amg Indu lt qd gt ang 9A
275. t the detail threshold for Main video PIIP Set the detail threshold for PIP video EXAMPLE DTT 50 Set the detail threshold to mid point for Main video EBB BLACK LEVEL BLENDING CONTROL GROUP Config Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION The Black Level Blending control allows for Black Level Blending Black Level Blending is the process of modifying the pixels in the bright overlapping areas that result from the overlapping of two or more images Correct adjustment eliminates uneven black levels by matching up black area hues with a target area hue the intersection of the center lines and adjusting the overlaps edges surrounding the target area Use the black test pattern to perform this function SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE SLCT Enables or disables Black Level Blending mode or choose a saved Christie TWIST Black Level Blending preset CNTV Changes edge blending black level in the center zone TOPV Changes edge blending black level in the top zone LFTV Changes edge blending black level in the left zone RHTV Changes edge blending black level in the right zone BTMV Changes edge blending black level in the bottom zone TLTV Changes edge blending black level in the top left zone TRTV Changes edge blending black level in the top right zone BLTV Changes edge blending black level in the bottom left zone BRTV Changes edge blending black lev
276. t the relevant channel and press ENTER The Channel Edit menu will appear similar to the sample illustration on the right Name 63 98kHz p60 02Hz Channel Slot 3 If desired review and or edit the following channel Input setups in the Channel Edit menu In Menu Auto Select Locked Previous Channel Next Channel Channel Edit Menu e NAME 1 2 3 4 E 6 rf 8 9 An alphanumeric label can be defined and or changed here Channel names can be up to 25 characters in length The default name is the horizontal and vertical sync frequencies e CHANNEL A 2 digit channel number can be changed here NOTES 1 fyou enter a channel number that already exists a dialog message appears indicating that this number is already in use assign a different channel number 2 You can define up to 99 channels e SLOT 1 4 corresponding to which slot in the projector input panel the source is connected INPUT 1 6 corresponding to which input on the selected slot the source is connected IN MENU If checked default except for automatically defined channels with unchanged parameters this defined channel will then appear in the list available when CHANNEL key is pressed If unchecked the channel must be accessed via CHANNEL on the keypad or via the Auto Source function NOTE On screen display of the channel list is an option that must be set in the Menu Preferences menu AUTO SELECT If checked default the projector ca
277. tation RTE Wizard Scheduled Event System Event GPIO Event Function Key Event DMX Channel Event Function Key Event Func 1 Func 2 Func 3 SSS 5585S et EEEE Description es unc A Func 8 5 haga Command String El Figure B 21 Function Key Event Serial Representation Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH ISTIE Appendix B Web UI To Add a DMX Channel Event 1 Click Add to open the RTE Wizard RTE Wizard Scheduled Event System Event GPIO Event Function Key Event E DMX Channel Event DMX Channel Event 2 Select the DMX Channel Event tab 3 Select a DMX channel DMX 56 to DMX 61 from the drop down list as shown in Figure B 22 Refer to Section 3 Operation for detailed information GPIO Output Helper Help El CEEI Figure B 22 DMX Channel Event Description Command String Serial Representation B 3 7 To Add a Serial Command 1 Enter a serial command in the Serial Command field NOTE See Appendix C Serial Command Overview and Appendix D Serial Command Reference 2 Click Send to add the serial command See Figure B 23 3 About Tabbed Page Provides information about the projector s software version model serial number and license information NOTE The information provided on the Version and License tabs are read only Figure B 23 Add Serial Command Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LED01 User Manual B 13
278. tern KCO KEYSTONE CURSOR OFFSET CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION This control offsets the 2D Keystone cursors from the edge of the image to allow manipulation of keystone on an overshot display SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE KCOT Adjusts top offset KCOB Adjusts bottom offset KCOL Adjusts left offset KCOR Adjusts right offset EXAMPLES KCO KCOT 25 Offsets the cursor by 25 pixels from the top edge KCO KCOB Returns the offset value in pixels from the bottom edge Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 37 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHKXISTIE KEN KEYPAD IR SENSOR DISABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Enable or disable the IR or wired keypad sensors You cannot disable the keypad that is currently being used SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE FRNT Set to 1 to enable the front IR keypad sensor 0 to disable WIRE Set to 1 to enable the wired keypad jack 0 to disable EXAMPLES KEN FRNT 0 Disable front IR sensor KEN WIRE Get current wired jack enabled state KEY KEY CODE EMULATION CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Use Key Codes to emulate button presses on the IR or wired keypads SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EX
279. tern 3 47 Light Module LM CAUTION 5 4 replacement 5 4 specifications 7 4 Locked channels 3 15 luma delay See Chrome Luma Delay 3 23 M MAC Address 3 36 Main Input 3 59 Main menu 3 7 Main Secondary Loop 3 31 Maintenance 5 1 to 5 5 Maintenance preventative 5 3 Markings projector 5 1 markings See labels master projector 3 56 Maximum Target Color Space selection 3 50 Menu Font Size 3 35 Menu key remote keypad 3 5 Menu Location Menu Preferences 3 32 menu navigation See also Menu Preferences check boxes 3 9 drop down lists 3 9 functions See Func key showing hiding 3 5 slide bars 3 8 Menu Preferences 3 32 Menu Tree 4 1 to 4 6 Menu Type Menu Preferences 3 33 menu channels 3 15 Minimum Brightness 3 48 minimum gamut 3 48 Moire artifact See Eye Motion Filter Mosquito Noise Reduction 3 28 Mounting specifications 7 5 N navigation See menu navigation negative numbers entering 3 6 Network Routing 3 35 Noise Reduction Settings menu 3 28 noise filter 3 23 noisy source input levels 3 24 number keys remote keypad 3 5 O on line help 3 8 Option Card Settings 3 47 Optional accessories 7 7 OSD showing hiding projector menus 3 5 OSD on screen display key See also menus OSD on screen display key remote key pad 3 5 OSD Transparency Menu Preferences 3 33 Output Level Detector 3 47 Output Options menu 3 30 Output Peak Detector 3 47 Overall Gain 3 40 overshoo
280. the Virtual OSD secondary tab c CHRISTIE Eman X Tools Admin Ml BI maximize Help e gt 4D A m gt Main Menu Size amp Position Image Settings 3 Channel Setup 5 Lamp y Configuration y 6 Status gt Secondary Input amp Switching Language English al Test Pattern on i Virtual OSD Figure B 6 Tools window B 4 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHRISTIE The following table describes each area found in the Tools window See Appendix B Web UI Figure B 6 Virtual OSD tab presents the Main Menu refer to Appendix A Menu Tree for more details The Maximize Minimize button toggles depending on the current state of the projector When maximized the Virtual OSD displays over the entire page so that subsequent menus can be viewed without scrolling No access to tabs when maximized Cc Help button presents a pop up window which provides information to help you navigate within the current menu OSD section contains an On and Off button Only one is enabled depending on the current state of the OSD Control of the OSD is always available through the remote Auto Setup button uses the manufacture s default settings refer to Section 3 Operation for more details Virtual OSD Menu Selecting an option from a menu displays its a
281. the amount of black in the image 0 100 For best results keep close to 50 Start with a high value and decrease so that dark areas do not become black Conversely high brightness changes black to dark grey causing washed out images Color Space Determines how the color components of an analog input signal are decoded for accurate color in the display Useful only for analog signals and certain digital sources Although color space for these analog signals is automatically determined by the projector you may wish to override this and manually set a specific color space NOTE For some signals the color space function is entirely automatic and the drop down list is disabled The current color space appears in the Image Settings menu Press ENTER to select a different option e Select RGB unless you are using component video e Select YCbCr Video with a standard definition televised signal SDTV e Select YCbCr HDTV with a high definition televised signal HDTV NOTE When certain RGB signals are first connected the projector may not recognize them as RGB and will incorrectly decode their color information as YPbPr video These signals can include e RGB signals in NTSC PAL SECAM frequency ranges e Scan doubled sync on green e Scan quadrupled sync on green For these signals change the color Space to RGB and then define a new channel for future use Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 21 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06
282. the intersection of the projector capability gamut line oe and the line from the target white point to the target color Primary primary Projector Capability Identifies the projector capability with respect to the array common color gamut as defined by Color Target and Brightness Target 100 indicates that the projector meets the target A greater number indicates that the projector can exceed the target A smaller number indicates how much the projector falls short of meeting the target Array Color Target ee eii Target Color Space User 1 Use this menu on the master projector to set the color target for the projector array These settings are enabled on master projectors only To make the current Target Red x 90 0 projector the master check Main gt Configuration gt Hd oo ArrayLOC gt Synchronize to This Projector 12 Auge e 5 Target Green y 0 600 NOTE f you are setting up a single projector create PAETI 0 150 an array of one and make it the master to enable the Target Blue y 0 060 color controls i Target Color Space 10 Copy Color Space From Sets the color space for the projector array i Us Changing this option displays the red green blue x KAALI A y values associated with the selected option 13 White Color Temperature 6500 m Selecting one of the user defined color spaces a displays the last saved values 15 Auto Color Enable O 16 Test Pattern Enable O
283. tical output through certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 mm 3 94 may pose an eye hazard The Light Module is a non serviceable part of the projector and must be replaced Contact customer support to arrange a replacement Lens Replacement EU ID The lens is factory aligned Do not loosen the yellow lens lock knob Refer to the Entero Service Manual P N 020 100368 xx if lens replacement is required e NU ile N The projector is a class 2M source of visible LED radiation Directly viewing the LED output with certain optical instruments for example eye loupes magnifiers and microscopes within a distance of 100 3 94 mm may pose an eye hazard Remove Lens Place the front lens cap onto the lens Remove and retain the 2 security screws from the lens mount see Figure 5 1 Loosen the lens lock knob Carefully remove the lens AE Ce he Place the rear lens cap back onto the lens Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHK IS TIE Section 5 Maintenance 5 4 2 Install Lens 1 Remove the rear lens cap from the lens Keep the front lens cap on the lens 2 Align the lens interface plate with the lens mount Fully insert the assembly straight into the lens mount opening without turning Press using your hand to engage the magnetic lock NOTICE Ensure the lens IS NOT inserted at an angle as this can cause damage
284. tics E id weight approx 60 lbs 27 kg shipping weight 68 lbs 31 kg approx Environment operating temperature 40 95 F 5 35 C non operating 4 122 F 20 50 C temperature humidity 20 80 non condensing altitude 0 300 m 0 10 000 ft Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 7 1 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 7 Specifications CHAISTIE RPMSP LEDO1 RPMWU LEDO1 RPMHD LEDO1 100 240 VAC 50 60Hz 45A Power rating voltage projection engine current consumption e Rating 370W dissipation maximum 1263 BTU hr Reliability and MTBF gt 50 000 hrs MTBF for all major modules serviceability TR e lt 15 minutes with modular design gt 5 minutes for lamp Regulatory approvals Calibration Directives EC 2002 95 EC RoHS Regulation EC No 1907 2006 REACH CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 1 UL 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A EN55024 CISPR24 Certifications marks check with Christie for latest update e CULus Canada amp US CE EU CCC China GoST R Russia KC Korea PSE Japan e C Tick Australia amp New Zealand All projection units are factory calibrated for best color performance Limited warranty Additional features and benefits 2 years parts and labor Contact an authorized Christie representative for full details of our limited warr
285. ting Keep Aspect On Auto Setup Ensures that auto setup for any source will maintain the input aspect ratio when the default size is calculated If disabled and the source is not a special case video source where a default stretch is defined the source is scaled to fit the platform Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 19 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation CH 1S TIE i 3 20 Blanking Active Input Window This read only value indicates the current size of your displayed data or region of interest as defined by the blanking controls By default the projector automatically determines what portion of its full resolution to use and pixels in the surrounding borders are turned off Specify the active input window size by adjusting one or more Blank settings Figure 3 5 For example if you have blanked cropped 100 pixels from both the left and right edges of an incoming source of 1400 x 1050 the remaining active input window will be reduced to 1200 x 1050 Blanking Top Bottom Left and Right Crop the image so that unwanted edges are removed from the display changed to black Blanking defines the size of the Active Input Window or area of interest Range of adjustment depends on the source 1050 Image resolution and other factors Ww J Ml Bankin unused pixels ___ Example incoming image NOTE Blanking a PIP image resembles zoom For example left Blankin
286. tinually search for the next valid signal when no signal is present or when loss of sync occurs on the current user selected Input In the case of multiple signals to choose from the order is based on Slot followed by Inputs on that Slot SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Enable or disable auto Input cycling EXAMPLES AIC 0 Disable auto Input cycling AIC 1 Enable auto Input cycling AIL AUTO INPUT LEVEL CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION If enabled this control allows the projector to continuously monitor the Input signal levels of the analog Inputs and make adjustments as needed Whenever the projector detects a level that would lead to the crushing of black or white levels it adjusts the Input offset or gain to compensate If the Input signal is not being crushed the projector will do nothing The Auto Input Level feature should only be used when the current source requires further Input level adjustment There must be at least 12 consecutive white pixels in the image in order to use Auto Input Levels The monitor period will run for 10 seconds after being issued Auto setup or source switching will stop the level period To use this control turn the Auto Input Level feature ON wait for the blacklevel and drive values to stabilize and turn the Auto Input Level feature off or wait for the 10 seconds When the Auto Input Level feature is turned OF
287. tion PWR 1 turn ON the projector if we receive any GPIO Input RTE G XXXXXLH description PWR 0 turn OFF the projector if pin 6 is set to low and pin 7 is high RTE G HH description FRZ 0 freeze the image if pins 1 and 2 are set to high RTE G XXHHXXH description FRZ 0 freeze the image if pins 3 4 7 are set to high RTE G LLHXX description FRZ 0 freeze the image if pins 1 2 are set to Low and pin 3 is set to high RTE G LLH description FRZ 0 freeze the image if pins 1 2 are set to Low and pin 3 is set to high SIN SELECT INPUT CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Select the active Input for the video in control VIC The VIC can be main or picture in picture PIP To specify a new Input routing enter the number of the Slot followed by the Input The projector will switch to that Input location and automatically select the channel best suited to the incoming signal For example 1 2 would indicate Slot 1 Input 2 D 60 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference SIN SELECT INPUT Cont d SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE MAIN Set the active Input for the main video PIIP Set the active Input for the picture in picture PIP video EXAMPLES SIN 12 Set main video to Slot 1 Input 2 SIN MAIN 45 Set main video to Sl
288. tion to enable the automatic display of a flat white test pattern when you select the Array Color Target menu The test pattern is turned OFF automatically when you exit the menu RGB Brightness Target Use this option to adjust the RGB brightness target for the array Projector Color Adjustment Projector Color Adjustment Use this menu to make ArrayLOC projector specific color adjustments These controls are used to fine tune the matching Red Part Of Red 100 0 performed by ArrayLOC after the targets have been set through the ERAS O 00 Target Color Space menu Blue Part Of Red 00 Green Part Of Green 100 0 These adjustments compensate for the projection system as a whole 6 Red Part Of Green 00 including loss of brightness or color shift due to lens mirror or 7 Blue Part Of Green 00 screen For example the mirror might not reflect blue 100 percent Blue Part Of Blue 100 0 or the screen might absorb more blue Measure the output at the 9 Red Part Of Blue O 00 screen with a color meter and use this option to adjust the blue until WESIAGEO 00 you get the array color target value at the screen 1 Red Part Of White 1000 Green Part Of White 100 0 Adjustments are specific to the target color space If the color space MENA 100 0 is changed for the array projector adjustments can be copied from Clear Adjustments the old target color space and fine tuned again Reset current adjustments
289. to defaults Auto Color Enable Target Color Space Test Pattern Enable O Copy Adjustments From Maximum y White Brightness Adjustment 100 0 x Use this option to change the color space Changing this option applies the red green blue x y values associated with the selected option It also updates the red green blue components of each color on this menu Selecting one of the user defined color spaces displays the last saved adjustment values The Target Color Space option is enabled only on the master projector All other projector specific color adjustments on this menu are available on all projectors at all times Red Part Green Part Blue Part of Each Color Use these options to make projector specific color adjustments to the selected Target Color Space Clear Adjustments Use this option to reset the color values to the color adjustment default values 0 or 100 Reset Current Adjustments To Defaults Use this option to reset the red part green part blue part of each color to the default values set at the factory during calibration Auto Color Enable Check this option to enable system background color to change based on the cursor s position in the Array Color Target menu e Red green blue part of red changes the system color to red e Red green blue part of green changes the system color to green Entero RPEMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 3 51 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 Section 3 Operation O s
290. tor Input Panel All source connections are made to the main input panel If additional connections are required install one of the available optional input modules For more details on connecting sources refer to 2 2 Connecting Sources on page 2 2 Status Display The 2 digit status display window displays the current status of the projector If there is an error during operation an error code number will display During normal operation ON will appear in the Status window Status LED Located next to the 2 digit status display is a single LED that illuminates one of 3 colors to convey the current status of the system A solid red LED shows a system error and the corresponding error code will display in the status display Refer to Table 6 1 LED Operational Status Codes for a description of LED variations Press EXIT twice on the keypad to acknowledge and clear the error IR Sensor The projector has a front IR sensor that is optimally placed to receive transmissions from the IR remote from up to 100 feet away regardless of the projector configuration For uninterrupted communications with the projector it is important to keep the transmission path to this sensor unobstructed at all times and to point the IR remote directly at the projector or center of the screen in rear screen applications Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 1 3 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 1 4 3 Key Features e WUXGA 1920 x 1200 resolution Or
291. ts Vertical keystone is used to correct a keystoned image shape in which the top and bottom borders of the image are unequal in length and both sides of the image are inclined toward the top or bottom edge see Figure 3 10 I1 Figure 3 10 Vertical Keystone Horizontal keystone is used to correct a keystoned image shape in which the left and right borders of the image are unequal in length and the top and bottom are slanted to one of the sides see Figure 3 11 Lt Figure 3 11 Horizontal Keystone 2D Keystone Cursor Offsets Use 2D Keystone settings to move the cursor in from the corner point when 2D Keystone Cursor Offsets a projector is overshooting and the cursors for adjustment are not visible 1 OffsetTop 0 Move the cursors in from the corners and make the keystone adjustments in the normal way 2 Offset Bottom 0 3 Offset Left 0 All settings to adjust keystone are in the Geometry Correction submenu 4 Offset Right 0 Brightness Uniformity Edge Blending and Black Level Blending should be disabled before performing keystone adjustments Adjusting an Image for Keystone Correction 1 Enable keystone adjustments by selecting Keystone from the Geometry Correction drop down list NOTE This will enable the controls for performing 1D or 2D keystone adjustments 2 Select a Test Pattern The Grid test pattern is recommended Geometry Correction Geometry Correction Keystone y Te
292. ty of parameters such as brightness contrast size etc in order to customize and optimize the display from or for a particular source For example the display settings you choose for a VCR source may be very different from those you choose for a high resolution computer source Once you have adjusted a display parameter such as pixel tracking or contrast all current settings are collectively stored in projector memory as a unique 2 digit channel such as 09 You can have numerous distinct channels available for the same input any of which can be selected by using the CHANNEL key on the keypad followed by the two digit channel number Shown in Current Channel Main Channel 03 01 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz 02 1 1 pDVI 77 14kHz p59 94Hz 03 1 2 p5W 63 98kHz p60 02Hz Channel Signal Horizontal Vertical Slot Type Frequency Frequency Input i Interlaced p Progressive Figure 3 4 Channel List Figure 3 4 is a sample channel list of channels available for Main Channel 03 Entero R PMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 3 11 3 12 Section 3 Operation i C s S SCSC A STE NOTE The CHANNEL key may display a channel list or not depending on what you have defined for Display Channel List see Menu Preferences later in this section Creating a New Channel To use a new source with the projector a new channel must be created so that the projector wil
293. ubleshooting ArrayLOC START HERE NN Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Projector Color Adjustment Menu gt Status Menu COCDED Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Array Color Target Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Color Saturation Reference Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt ArrayLOC Configuration Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt Advanced Color Adjustment Go to the Main gt Configuration 4 gt ArrayLOC 13 gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration 3 menu A7 Menu gt Configuration gt ArrayLOC gt Bright ColorLOC Configuration Menu gt Configuration gt Service gt ArrayLOC Service Select the Array Status menu item to display the Bright ColorLOC Array Status Do the colors and brightness of the array projectors match Does replacing the LMs of the problem projectors resolve the problem Projectors can be removed from the ArrayLOC array by any of the following methods a Turning the projector OFF b Disconnecting the ArrayLOC network if using the PHM Network c Setting the Bright ColorLOC Mode to OFF d Setting the Bright ColorLOC Group to a different number Does removing the problem projectors from the ArrayLOC array resolve the problem Are the array colors red green blue white the expected colors Recalibrate the internal sensor of the problem projectors OR Are the Minimum Gamut and Minimum Brightness thresholds Call Tech Su
294. ust turn black and full on pixels just turn full ON When adjustment is completed this control should be disabled to allow display of all grey levels This control takes place before the scaler deinterlacer SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES PDT 1 Turn ON peak detector PDT 0 Turn OFF peak detector PHP PIP HORIZONTAL POSITION CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Sets the horizontal position of the PIP window Specifies where to place the center of the PIP window horizontally on the panel in pixels SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES PHP 100 Set PIP horizontal position to 100 pixels PHP Get PIP horizontal position PHP 100 for example PHS PIP HORIZONTAL SIZE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Sets the size width of the PIP window in pixels The active portion of the Input signal as determined by blanking controls will be scaled to fit into the PIP window The height of the PIP window will be set to maintain the aspect ratio of the image being captured as determined by the vertical stretch control SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES PHS 100 Set PIP size to 100 pixels PHS Get PIP size PHS 100 for example D 48 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 1
295. ved with the current channel From your presentation you can access any of the individual options in these menus by pressing MENU followed by the appropriate number keys representing their location in the menu system For example press MENU then 2 then 7 then 1 to quickly access the Gamma Settings option in the Image Settings gt Advanced Image Settings menu NOTES 1 Some frequently used display functions have dedicated keys on the IR remote For example press CONTRAST to access the contrast slide bar Press EXIT to return to your presentation 2 To hide direct slide bars disable the Display Slide bars check box MSSM Standard in the Menu Preferences menu 3 To hide the entire menu system from view turn off the on screen display by pressing OSD then the DOWN Arrow Key Gamma Settings 1 Gamma Correction 0 Automatic Image Setup Auto setup is a good first step in setting up the image Press AUTO on the remote This optimizes critical display parameters such as size position pixel tracking etc based on the type of incoming source An Auto Setup can save considerable setup time and you can still adjust the image as described below The best auto setup will be obtained under the following conditions e Input levels It is best to have an image with saturated very Bright colors Phase High contrast edges are needed To determine active window size e Video images should have whites
296. vel to 40 on main video TNT MAIN 40 Set tint level to 40 on main video TNT PIIP 20 Set tint level to 20 on PIP video TNT IN32 40 Set tint level to 40 on Slot 3 Input 2 TNT Returns the current tint level on main video TNT PIIP Returns the current tint level on PIP video TNT IN 12 Returns the current tint level on Slot 1 Input 2 TPE TEST PATTERN ENABLE CONTROL GROUP Preference SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Automatically select White test pattern based on the control being adjusted Certain controls that deal with color settings will enable white test pattern when entering OSD menus and disable when exiting the menu This control defines whether this happens There are some situations where the user may not want to automatically go toa white test pattern when the OSD menu is selected for example if they have specific content that they wish to evaluate 0 Disable automatic test pattern enable 1 Enable automatic test pattern enable SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt EXAMPLES TPE 0 Disable test pattern enable TPE Report state of test pattern enable Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 69 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE TTM THIC TRANSMITTER MODE CONFIGURATION CONTROL GROUP Option SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Select a wor
297. ver that a projector has a different baud rate use the drop down list and select the correct baud rate using the ENTER key DO NOT scroll this control with LEFT arrow key or RIGHT arrow key Serial communication is always 8 data bits no parity Serial Flow Control Serial RS 232 IN Options Determines whether software flow control or no flow control is Baud Rate RS 232 IN used when transmitting and receiving data on the serial port 2 Serial Flow Control RS 232 IN Serial Mode RS 232 IN 8N1 Serial Mode Serial Protocol RS 232IN Christie Protocol Select the serial data mode The mode includes the number of bits the parity and the number of stop bits Serial Protocol Select the protocol used on the serial communications port Projector Address Enter a number up to 3 digits in length such as 001 to assign or change a number to the projector currently in use If the current projector already has a number assigned that number will appear here Numerical identity for projectors enables you to communicate with a single projector within a multiple projector application see also PROJ key described in 3 Using the IR Remote on page 3 1 If you make a mistake in assigning or changing the projector number press EXIT to cancel NOTE When multiple projectors are being used and you want to adjust the color for individual projectors to create a seamless image you must assign different numbers for eac
298. video EXAMPLE CCS 0 Set the color temp setting to max drives for main video CHA CHANNEL CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Up ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Select the channel to use in the range 1 99 Switching channels will switch to the appropriate option card Input If the signal signature in the channel does not match the signal on the channel s Input the channel change will switch to the auto channel or to the channel that was defined for the signal signature that is on the channel s Input This command will fail if the data in the channel file does not match the current system hardware This command can also be used to copy delete and edit certain channel properties SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE COPY Make a copy of a channel and assign it a unique number optionally specify a new channel number DLET Delete a channel MAIN Set the channel being used by main Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual D 17 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 Appendix D Serial Command Reference CHAISTIE CHA CHANNEL Cont d PIIP Set the channel being used by PIP INFO Display the information on the current channel EXAMPLES CHA Get current active channel CHA 10 Set main to channel 10 CHA PIIP 99 Set PIP to channel 99 CHA COPY 1 Make a copy of channel 1 using the next free channel number CHA COPY 1 20 Make a copy of channel 1 and copy to c
299. w 943 u 19 ny ueg e18no 13 U39 JyBIy Ja uag Yo J u109 yry woyog apis 1y61y Ja J u109 4fry do JWOD Ya woog SPIS WOT J u109 ya7 do juauwjsn py esieog UJSYed 189 e1qeuz Aywuoylun sseujyBug yunoyu y sseujybug OL GL vl El CL LL NONO e Ei s6um s Bu pua g 6p3 josay Z 1 4 4 UOpON 9 3 LL J8y14 UOHOW eAZ USaJs My OL Bu pua g aBp3 pasuerpy dejiano Buipuag mous UIPIM puajg wopog UP IM Puajg do UIPIM Pulg JyBly UIPIM Pue g Yo Weed sel Suipuajg 6p3 5u pue g 6p3 6 8 KNOT OO DO HojogAybug Aeuy El 40 9 p 9BEy 29S sBumeas pled uondo LL N S OL uoneaqijeg 9 soysouBbelg 6 SUOHEIIUNUWIWIOD Z saqualajald NU W 9 aul 9 ALA G jJuawebeuey 1aMod t suoydo mamo z ebenbue7 Of p p 9BEey 29S biH JOSHO 497 SHO woog JOSHO do JesHo SJOSHO 10SINH SUOJS SA Gz NODS UONISOd UO HISOd H S SYO JOSIND SUOJS DA AZ sBumas auojs sy Josoy auojshey az ISn py auojs sy esa Jsn py auojs sy ejuozuoy jsn py ulayed S L UORIALOD ljauoas U013991109 Ayjawo0e5 TNAM L0Ono Oo dnyes Burn OL Bu pua g 997 198e g juauysn py 10 09 JOJD9 O0JY joBie 10409 BJI Suipuejg ebpy Ayunoyu sseujyBlig UONIAOD ljauoas UJSped S L 10 09 3
300. ween the starting and the 3 character ASCII code Table C 3 Message for Specific Projector Addr Code Data Each projector compares the message address with its own address and if matching responds and processes the message If the address does not match the message is passed on until it reaches the intended projector Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Appendix C Serial Command Overview Although messages without an address are always broadcast you can also broadcast by including the reply destination address 65535 This ensures that replies go to a specific controller address rather than being broadcast The projector will also include its address Table C 4 Message for Projector from a Specific Controller Dest Sre Code Data If you have more than one controller on a network ensure to include both a source address and a destination address With a single controller on the network its address is never required Place the source address between the destination address and 3 character code including a space before and after as shown NOTE Replies from a projector do not contain an address unless the request message includes both a destination address and a source address i e a reply to a request having only a destination address will not have any source address Table C 5 Message for Specific Projector from a Specific Controller Dest Sre Code Data
301. wn ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Query a list of all available serial commands with brief descriptions and current enabled states SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE lt No Subcode gt Request entire command Help listing or list for a single command EXAMPLES HLP Retrieve entire command Help listing HLP BRT Retrieve all subcodes descriptions enables for BRT control D 34 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 6 2012 CHAISTIE Appendix D Serial Command Reference HLT PROJECTOR HEALTH CONTROL GROUP Unsaved SUBCLASS Power Down ACCESS LEVEL Operator DESCRIPTION Any system health errors are placed on the troubleshooting queue The queue which contains the problems and a suggested solution for each one is read only All problems in the queue are read using their index number which starts from 0 Problems are assigned priorities 1 Critical Will result in failure to operate or shutdown 2 High Will result in significant loss of functionality but the projector may continue to run 3 Low Will result in minor loss of functionality which will not seriously affect projector SUBCODE DESCRIPTION OF USE LSOL List solutions LALL List one or all problems and solutions EXAMPLES HLT Returns all queued problems HLT 3 Returns problem index 3 in the queue HLT LSOL 4 Returns the solution hint for problem index 4 in the queue HLT LAL
302. x Wy projector white CIE 1931 y capability 3 53 Y YPbPr HDTV color space 3 21 YPbPr Video color space 3 21 Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual Index 5 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 000 101814 03x ASSY TECH DOCS Entero Corporate offices USA Cypress ph 714 236 8610 Canada Kitchener ph 519 744 8005 Worldwide offices United Kingdom ph 44 118 977 8000 France ph 33 0 141 210036 Germany ph 49 2161 664540 Eastern Europe ph 36 0 147 48 100 Middle East ph 971 0 42997575 Spain ph 34 91 633 9990 Singapore ph 65 6877 8737 Beijing ph 86 10 6561 0240 Shanghai ph 86 21 6278 7708 For the most current technical documentation please visit www christiedigital com Japan ph 81 3 3599 7481 South Korea ph 82 2 702 1601 CHRISTIE
303. y Color Space From Updates the Target Red x y Green x y Blue x y values based on the color space selected from the list This option is available only when the Target Color Space is set to one of the user defined options User 1 though 4 Select White Point This drop down is not available on Entero projectors Set White to Color Temperature Check this option to recalculate Target White x y values based on the specified standard White Color Temperature This option is available only when Select White Point is set to one of the user defined options User White 1 through 4 This option is unchecked automatically when you change the Select White Point option White Color Temperature Use this option to specify the white color temperature used to calculate and update the Target White x y values This option is available only when Set White to Color Temperature is checked Auto Color Enable Check this option to enable system background color to change based on the cursor s position in the Array Color Target menu Target Red x y changes the system color to red Target Green x y changes the system color to green e Target Blue x y changes the system color to blue All other menu options change the system color to white The color resets automatically when you exit the menu Entero RPMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CH IS TIE Section 3 Operation Test Pattern Enable Check this op
304. y determines the best input levels by monitoring image content and adjusting the controls appropriately further adjustment is typically not required to obtain proper blacks or whites NOTE This automatic adjustment requires at least 6 12 consecutive white pixels in the image Without these pixels input levels may produce skewed colors particularly in non video images For a source exhibiting overly high black levels typically caused by a noisy source causing black level spikes use the Input Levels menu These adjustments serve as a calibration process compensating for differences in sources and cabling and perfect the source image input levels to eliminate overshoot and undershoot NOTES 1 Input Levels are of limited use with digital signals but do offer some ability to tweak poorly mastered source materials 2 Input levels apply for the current source only but for any color temperature used 3 Assuming that color temperature has been set up based on the internal test patterns you can then set up input levels for a given source so that it matches the color temperature of the internal test patterns Auto Input Level Use only if you are an experienced user and you have an unusual source that you feel needs further color temperature and or input level adjustment This compensates for incoming out of range drives white and black levels black that would cause crushing of light and dark colors in the image After entering a chec
305. yore 10409 Aeuy NONO uoyembyuog DOHODA g 10 9 f01d SIY 0 SZIUOJY9U S NO 9074t uy DOT BLY El suyos pie uondo LL BINS OL uO peque 9 sonsouBelg JOJO AJaWwoay SUOI EOIUNWWWOD sa3uaJajalJg NU W au 8 3q yuswabeuepy Jomog TNOnN AOD suondo yndjno enbue7 uoyeInbijuoy N UlSHEd 1891 6 enbue g Bulyoyms 3 indu s1epuodas 7 snes 9 uO JeInByuoy y dnjas auueyo e s6umes ewl z UO ISOd pue 8ZIS nue UIC Entero R PMWU RPMSP RPMHD LEDO1 User Manual 4 6 020 100367 05 Rev 1 06 2012 CHRISTIE 5 1 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 Maintenance Maintaining Proper Cooling Air vents are located around the projector to keep it at a consistent operating temperature Make sure that the empty space around these vents stay out zone is within the limits specified in Section 7 Specifications This will prevent the blockage of air flow and prevent overheating The projector is equipped with active thermal monitoring The speed of the cooling fans adjust to the projector temperature e Do not put the projector on a radiator or heat register Do not put the projector in an enclosure without correct ventilation e Do not put objects into the ventilation openings of the projector They can touch dangerous voltages or short circuit components resulting in a fire or shock hazard e Do not spill liquids into the proje

020-100367-05_LIT MAN USR Entero RPMWU-RPMSP

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents